AD9558BCPZ [ADI]

Quad Input Multiservice Line Card Adaptive Clock Translator with Frame Sync;
AD9558BCPZ
型号: AD9558BCPZ
厂家: ADI    ADI
描述:

Quad Input Multiservice Line Card Adaptive Clock Translator with Frame Sync

文件: 总104页 (文件大小:1444K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
Quad Input Multiservice Line Card Adaptive  
Clock Translator with Frame Sync  
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
Pin program function for easy frequency translation  
FEATURES  
configuration  
Supports GR-1244 Stratum 3 stability in holdover mode  
Supports smooth reference switchover with virtually  
no disturbance on output phase  
Software controlled power-down  
64-lead, 9 mm × 9 mm, LFCSP package  
Supports Telcordia GR-253 jitter generation, transfer, and  
tolerance for SONET/SDH up to OC-192 systems  
Supports ITU-T G.8262 synchronous Ethernet slave clocks  
Supports ITU-T G.823, G.824, G.825, and G.8261  
Auto/manual holdover and reference switchover  
4 reference inputs (single-ended or differential)  
Input reference frequencies: 2 kHz to 1250 MHz  
Reference validation and frequency monitoring (1 ppm)  
Programmable input reference switchover priority  
20-bit programmable input reference divider  
6 pairs of clock output pins with each pair configurable as  
a single differential LVDS/HSTL output or as 2 single-ended  
CMOS outputs  
Output frequencies: 352 Hz to 1250 MHz  
Programmable 17-bit integer and 24-bit fractional  
feedback divider in digital PLL  
Programmable digital loop filter covering loop bandwidths  
from 0.1 Hz to 5 kHz (2 kHz maximum for <0.1 dB of  
peaking)  
APPLICATIONS  
Network synchronization, including synchronous Ethernet  
and SDH to OTN mapping/demapping  
Cleanup of reference clock jitter  
SONET/SDH clocks up to OC-192, including FEC  
Stratum 3 holdover, jitter cleanup, and phase transient  
control  
Wireless base station controllers  
Cable infrastructure  
Data communications  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
The AD9558 is a low loop bandwidth clock multiplier that  
provides jitter cleanup and synchronization for many systems,  
including synchronous optical networks (SONET/SDH). The  
AD9558 generates an output clock synchronized to up to four  
external input references. The digital PLL allows for reduction  
of input time jitter or phase noise associated with the external  
references. The digitally controlled loop and holdover circuitry  
of the AD9558 continuously generates a low jitter output clock  
even when all reference inputs have failed.  
Low noise system clock multiplier  
Frame sync support  
Adaptive clocking  
The AD9558 operates over an industrial temperature range of  
−40°C to +85°C. If a smaller package is required, refer to the  
AD9557 for the two-input/two-output version of the same part.  
Optional crystal resonator for system clock input  
On-chip EEPROM to store multiple power-up profiles  
FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM  
STABLE  
SOURCE  
AD9558  
CHANNEL 0  
DIVIDER  
CLOCK  
MULTIPLIER  
CHANNEL 1  
DIVIDER  
÷3 TO ÷11  
HF DIVIDER 0  
DIGITAL  
PLL  
ANALOG  
PLL  
CHANNEL 2  
DIVIDER  
÷3 TO ÷11  
HF DIVIDER 1  
REFERENCE INPUT  
AND  
MONITOR MUX  
CHANNEL 3  
DIVIDER  
FRAME SYNC  
SERIAL INTERFACE  
STATUS AND  
CONTROL PINS  
EEPROM  
2
(SPI OR I C)  
Figure 1.  
Rev. A  
Information furnished by Analog Devices is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no  
responsibility is assumed by Analog Devices for its use, nor for any infringements of patents or other  
rights of third parties that may result from its use. Specifications subject to change without notice. No  
license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of Analog Devices.  
Trademarks and registeredtrademarks arethe property of their respective owners.  
One Technology Way, P.O. Box 9106, Norwood, MA 02062-9106, U.S.A.  
Tel: 781.329.4700 www.analog.com  
Fax: 781.461.3113 ©2011–2012 Analog Devices, Inc. All rights reserved.  
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Features .............................................................................................. 1  
Digital PLL (DPLL) Core .......................................................... 31  
Loop Control State Machine..................................................... 34  
System Clock (SYSCLK)................................................................ 35  
System Clock Inputs................................................................... 35  
System Clock Multiplier............................................................ 35  
Output PLL (APLL) ....................................................................... 37  
Clock Distribution.......................................................................... 38  
Clock Dividers ............................................................................ 38  
Output Power-Down ................................................................. 38  
Output Enable............................................................................. 38  
Output Mode .............................................................................. 38  
Clock Distribution Synchronization........................................ 38  
Frame Synchronization.................................................................. 40  
Reference Configuration in Frame Synchronization Mode . 40  
Clock Outputs in Frame Synchronization Mode................... 40  
Control Registers for Frame Synchronization Mode............. 40  
Level Sensitive Mode and One-Shot Mode............................. 40  
Applications....................................................................................... 1  
General Description......................................................................... 1  
Functional Block Diagram .............................................................. 1  
Revision History ............................................................................... 3  
Specifications..................................................................................... 4  
Supply Voltage............................................................................... 4  
Supply Current.............................................................................. 4  
Power Dissipation......................................................................... 5  
RESET  
, PINCONTROL, M7 to M0).... 5  
Logic Inputs (  
,
SYNC  
Logic Outputs (M7 to M0, IRQ) ................................................ 6  
System Clock Inputs (XOA, XOB) ............................................. 6  
Reference Inputs ........................................................................... 7  
Reference Monitors ...................................................................... 8  
Reference Switchover Specifications.......................................... 8  
Distribution Clock Outputs ........................................................ 9  
Time Duration of Digital Functions ........................................ 10  
Digital PLL .................................................................................. 11  
Digital PLL Lock Detection ...................................................... 11  
Holdover Specifications............................................................. 11  
Serial Port Specifications—SPI Mode...................................... 12  
Serial Port Specifications—I2C Mode...................................... 13  
Jitter Generation ......................................................................... 13  
Absolute Maximum Ratings.......................................................... 16  
ESD Caution................................................................................ 16  
Pin Configuration and Function Descriptions........................... 17  
Typical Performance Characteristics ........................................... 20  
Input/Output Termination Recommendations.......................... 25  
Getting Started................................................................................ 26  
Chip Power Monitor and Startup............................................. 26  
Multifunction Pins at Reset/Power-Up ................................... 26  
Channel Divider 3/OUT5 Programming in Frame  
Synchronization Mode .............................................................. 41  
Status and Control.......................................................................... 42  
Multifunction Pins (M7 to M0) ............................................... 42  
Watchdog Timer......................................................................... 43  
EEPROM ..................................................................................... 43  
Serial Control Port ......................................................................... 49  
SPI/IꢀC Port Selection................................................................ 49  
SPI Serial Port Operation.......................................................... 49  
IꢀC Serial Port Operation.......................................................... 53  
Programming the I/O Registers ................................................... 56  
Buffered/Active Registers.......................................................... 56  
Autoclear Registers..................................................................... 56  
Register Access Restrictions...................................................... 56  
Thermal Performance.................................................................... 57  
Power Supply Partitions................................................................. 58  
Recommended Configuration for 3.3 V Switching Supply .. 58  
Configuration for 1.8 V Supply................................................ 58  
Pin Program Function Description ............................................. 59  
Overview of On-Chip ROM Features ..................................... 59  
Hard Pin Programming Mode.................................................. 60  
Soft Pin Programming Overview............................................. 61  
Register Map ................................................................................... 62  
Device Register Programming When Using a Register  
Setup File ..................................................................................... 26  
Register Programming Overview............................................. 26  
Theory of Operation ...................................................................... 29  
Overview...................................................................................... 29  
Reference Clock Inputs.............................................................. 30  
Reference Monitors .................................................................... 30  
Reference Profiles....................................................................... 30  
Reference Switchover................................................................. 30  
Rev. A | Page 2 of 104  
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
Register Map Bit Descriptions.......................................................72  
Frame Synchronization (Register 0x0640 to  
Register 0x0641)..........................................................................86  
Serial Port Configuration (Register 0x0000 to  
Register 0x0005)..........................................................................72  
DPLL Profile Registers (Register 0x0700 to  
Register 0x07E6) .........................................................................87  
Silicon Revision (Register 0x000A) ..........................................72  
Clock Part Serial ID (Register 0x000C to Register 0x000D).72  
System Clock (Register 0x0100 to Register 0x0108) ..............73  
Operational Controls (Register 0x0A00 to  
Register 0x0A10).........................................................................89  
Quick In/Out Frequency Soft Pin Configuration  
(Register 0x0C00 to Register 0x0C08) .....................................92  
General Configuration (Register 0x0200 to  
Register 0x0214)..........................................................................74  
Status ReadBack (Register 0x0D00 to Register 0x0D14).......93  
EEPROM Control (Register 0x0E00 to Register 0x0E03).....97  
IRQ Mask (Register 0x020A to Register 0x020F)...................75  
DPLL Configuration (Register 0x0300 to Register 0x032E).76  
EEPROM Storage Sequences (Register 0x0E10 to  
Register 0x0E3C).........................................................................98  
Output PLL Configuration (Register 0x0400 to  
Register 0x0408)..........................................................................79  
Outline Dimensions......................................................................104  
Ordering Guide .........................................................................104  
Output Clock Distribution (Register 0x0500 to  
Register 0x0515)..........................................................................81  
Reference Inputs (Register 0x0500 to Register 0x0507) ........85  
REVISION HISTORY  
4/12—Rev 0 to Rev. A  
Changes to Address 0x071A and Address 0x071D, Table 35.... 65  
Changes to Address 0x0780, Address 0x0785 to  
Address 0x078A, Address 0x079A, Address 0x079D, Table 35... 67  
Changes to Address 0x07C0, Address 0x07DA, and  
Changed 3 Hz to 352 kHz in Output Frequencies List Item,  
Features Section................................................................................. 1  
Change to Output Frequency Range Parameter, Min; and System  
Clock Input Doubler Duty Cycle Parameter Description, Table 6... 6  
Changes to Test Conditions/Comments Column, Table 9 .......... 8  
Changes to Output Frequency Parameters, Min, Table 10.......... 9  
Changes to Pin 4 and Pin 42, Table 20 .........................................17  
Changes to Device Register Programming When Using a  
Register Setup File and Register Programming Overview  
Sections.............................................................................................26  
Changed APLL VCO Lower Frequency and OUT5 Frequency  
Range, Figure 35; Changed 225 MHz to 200 MHz and 3.45 GHz  
to 3.35 GHz in Overview Section...................................................29  
Changes to Reference Profiles Section .........................................30  
Changes to Programmable Digital Loop Filter Section .............32  
Changes to System Clock Inputs Section.....................................35  
Changes to Output PLL (APLL) Section; Changes to Figure 39 ....37  
Changes to Figure 40; Changed 1024 to 1023 in Clock Dividers  
Section; Changes to Clock Distribution Synchronization  
Section ..............................................................................................38  
Changes to Multifunction Pins (M7 to M0) and IRQ Pin  
Sections.............................................................................................42  
Changes to Figure 44 ......................................................................43  
Changes to EEPROM Conditional Processing Section and  
Address 0x07DD, Table 35............................................................. 68  
Change to Address 0x0A01, Bit 7, Table 35................................. 69  
Added Address 0x0E3D to Address 0x0E45, Table 35............... 71  
Change to Table 38; Added Table 40, Renumbered Sequentially;  
Changes to Table 41 ........................................................................ 72  
Change to Bit 0, Address 0x0101, Table 43.................................. 73  
Changes to Address 0x0304, Table 55 .......................................... 76  
Deleted Address 0x0305, Table 55 ................................................ 76  
Changes to Table Title, Table 63; Changes to Address 0x0400  
and Address 0x0403, Table 64........................................................ 79  
Changes to Address 0x0405, Table 64 .......................................... 80  
Changes to Descriptions, Address 0x0500, Table 67.................. 81  
Changes to Bit 0, Address 0x0501, Table 68 ................................ 82  
Changes to Bits[6:4], Address 0x0505 and Changes to  
Address 0x0506, Table 70............................................................... 83  
Changes to Bits[6:4] and Bit 0, Address 0x050F, Table 73......... 84  
Change to Address 0x0704, Table 78; Changes to Bits[3:0] in  
Address 0x0707 and Address 070A, Table 79; and Changes to  
Address 0x070E, Table 82................................................................ 87  
Changes to Address 0x0710, Table 83; and Changes to Bits[3:0],  
Address 0x0714, Table 84................................................................. 88  
Changes to Bits[1:0], Address 0x0A01, Table 90........................... 89  
Changes to Descriptions, Address 0x0A0B, Table 99................. 91  
Changes to Bit 4, Address 0x0C06, Table 100 ............................. 93  
Changes to Bit 6 and Bit 1, Address 0x0D01, Table 102 ............ 94  
Changes to Table Summary, Table 114......................................... 98  
Added Table 128............................................................................101  
Changes to Table 129....................................................................102  
Changes to Table 130....................................................................103  
Figure 45............................................................................................46  
Added Programming the EEPROM to Configure an M Pin  
to Control Synchronization of Clock Distribution Section .........48  
Changes to the Power Supply Partitions Section ........................58  
Changed 89.5° to 88.5° in DPLL Phase Margin Section ............59  
Changes to Address 0x0006, Address 0x0007, and  
Address 0x000A, Table 35 ..............................................................62  
Changes to Address 0x0304, Table 35 ..........................................63  
Changes to Address 0x0405, Table 35 ..........................................64  
10/11—Revision 0: Initial Version  
Rev. A | Page 3 of 104  
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
SPECIFICATIONS  
Minimum (min) and maximum (max) values apply for the full range of supply voltage and operating temperature variations. Typical (typ)  
values apply for AVDD3 = DVDD_I/O = 3.3 V; AVDD = DVDD= 1.8 V; TA= 25°C, unless otherwise noted.  
SUPPLY VOLTAGE  
Table 1.  
Parameter  
SUPPLY VOLTAGE  
DVDD3  
DVDD  
AVDD3  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions/Comments  
3.135  
1.71  
3.135  
1.71  
3.30  
1.80  
3.30  
1.80  
3.465  
1.89  
3.465  
1.89  
V
V
V
V
AVDD  
SUPPLY CURRENT  
The test conditions for the maximum (max) supply current are the same as the test conditions for the All Blocks Running parameter of  
Table 3. The test conditions for the typical (typ) supply current are the same as the test conditions for the Typical Configuration parameter  
of Table 3.  
Table 2.  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions/Comments  
SUPPLY CURRENT FOR TYPICAL  
CONFIGURATION  
Typical numbers are for the typical configuration listed  
in Table 3  
IDVDD3  
IDVDD  
IAVDD3  
IAVDD  
12  
12  
50  
152  
19  
20  
70  
230  
26  
28  
92  
305  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
Pin 45, Pin 46, Pin 51, Pin 52, Pin 64  
Pin 6, Pin 55, Pin 56  
Pin 25, Pin 26, Pin 31  
Pin 7, Pin 10, Pin 12, Pin 17, Pin 22, Pin 29, Pin 30, Pin 35,  
Pin 37, Pin 38  
SUPPLY CURRENT FOR THE ALL BLOCKS  
RUNNING CONFIGURATION  
Maximum numbers are for all blocks running configuration  
in Table 3  
IDVDD3  
IDVDD  
IAVDD3  
IAVDD  
23  
11  
73  
168  
34  
22  
108  
250  
46  
32  
143  
331  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
Pin 45, Pin 46, Pin 51, Pin 52, Pin 64  
Pin 6, Pin 55, Pin 56  
Pin 25, Pin 26, Pin 31  
Pin 7, Pin 10, Pin 12, Pin 17, Pin 22, Pin 29, Pin 30, Pin 35,  
Pin 37, Pin 38  
Rev. A | Page 4 of 104  
 
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
POWER DISSIPATION  
Table 3.  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions/Comments  
POWER DISSIPATION  
Typical Configuration  
0.47  
0.74  
1.02  
W
System clock: 49.152 MHz crystal; DPLL active;  
both 19.44 MHz input references in differential mode;  
one HSTL driver at 644.53125 MHz;  
one 3.3 V CMOS driver at 161.1328125 MHz and 80 pF  
capacitive load on CMOS output  
All Blocks Running  
0.6  
1.0  
44  
1.32  
125  
W
System clock: 49.152 MHz crystal; DPLL active;  
both input references in differential mode;  
four HSTL drivers at 750 MHz;  
four 3.3 V CMOS drivers at 250 MHz and 80 pF capacitive  
load on CMOS outputs  
Full Power-Down  
mW  
Typical configuration with no external pull-up or pull-  
down resistors; about 2/3 of this power is on AVDD3  
Incremental Power Dissipation  
Conditions = typical configuration; table values show the  
change in power due to the indicated operation  
Input Reference On/Off  
Differential Without Divide-by-2  
Differential With Divide-by-2  
Single-Ended (Without Divide-by-2)  
Output Distribution Driver On/Off  
LVDS (at 750 MHz)  
20  
26  
5
25  
32  
7
32  
40  
9
mW  
mW  
mW  
Additional current draw is in the DVDD3 domain only  
Additional current draw is in the DVDD3 domain only  
Additional current draw is in the DVDD3 domain only  
12  
14  
14  
18  
17  
21  
21  
27  
22  
28  
28  
36  
mW  
mW  
mW  
mW  
Additional current draw is in the AVDD domain only  
Additional current draw is in the AVDD domain only  
A single 1.8 V CMOS output with an 80 pF load  
A single 3.3 V CMOS output with an 80 pF load  
HSTL (at 750 MHz)  
1.8 V CMOS (at 250 MHz)  
3.3 V CMOS (at 250 MHz)  
Other Blocks On/Off  
Second RF Divider  
Channel Divider Bypassed  
36  
10  
51  
17  
64  
23  
mW  
mW  
Additional current draw is in the AVDD domain only  
Additional current draw is in the AVDD domain only  
LOGIC INPUTS (SYNC, RESET, PINCONTROL, M7 TO M0)  
Table 4.  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions/Comments  
LOGIC INPUTS (SYNC, RESET, PINCONTROL)  
Input High Voltage (VIH)  
Input Low Voltage (VIL)  
Input Current (IINH, IINL)  
Input Capacitance (CIN)  
LOGIC INPUTS (M7 to M0)  
Input High Voltage (VIH)  
Input ½ Level Voltage (VIM)  
Input Low Voltage (VIL)  
Input Current (IINH, IINL)  
Input Capacitance (CIN)  
2.1  
V
V
μA  
pF  
0.8  
100  
50  
3
2.5  
1.0  
V
V
V
μA  
pF  
2.2  
0.6  
100  
60  
3
Rev. A | Page 5 of 104  
 
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
LOGIC OUTPUTS (M7 TO M0, IRQ)  
Table 5.  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions/Comments  
LOGIC OUTPUTS (M7 to M0, IRQ)  
Output High Voltage (VOH)  
Output Low Voltage (VOL)  
IRQ Leakage Current  
Active Low Output Mode  
Active High Output Mode  
DVDD3 − 0.4  
V
V
IOH = 1 mA  
IOL = 1 mA  
Open-drain mode  
VOH = 3.3 V  
VOL = 0 V  
0.4  
−200  
100  
ꢀA  
ꢀA  
SYSTEM CLOCK INPUTS (XOA, XOB)  
Table 6.  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions/Comments  
SYSTEM CLOCK MULTIPLIER  
Output Frequency Range  
750  
805  
MHz  
The VCO range may place limitations on  
nonstandard system clock input  
frequencies  
Phase Frequency Detector (PFD) Rate  
Frequency Multiplication Range  
150  
255  
MHz  
2
Assumes valid system clock and PFD  
rates  
SYSTEM CLOCK REFERENCE INPUT PATH  
Input Frequency Range  
Minimum Input Slew Rate  
10  
20  
600  
MHz  
V/ꢀs  
Minimum limit imposed for jitter  
performance  
Common-Mode Voltage  
Differential Input Voltage Sensitivity  
1.05  
250  
1.16  
1.25  
V
Internally generated  
mV p-p Minimum voltage across pins required  
to ensure switching between logic  
states; the instantaneous voltage on  
either pin must not exceed the supply  
rails; can accommodate single-ended  
input by ac grounding of complementary  
input; 1 V p-p recommended for optimal  
jitter performance  
System Clock Input Doubler Duty Cycle  
This is the amount of duty cycle  
variation that can be tolerated on the  
system clock input to use the doubler  
System Clock Input = 50 MHz  
System Clock Input = 20 MHz  
System Clock Input = 16 MHz to 20 MHz 47  
Input Capacitance  
45  
46  
50  
50  
50  
3
55  
54  
53  
%
%
%
pF  
Single-ended, each pin  
Input Resistance  
4.2  
kΩ  
CRYSTAL RESONATOR PATH  
Crystal Resonator Frequency Range  
Maximum Crystal Motional Resistance  
10  
50  
100  
MHz  
Ω
Fundamental mode, AT cut crystal  
Rev. A | Page 6 of 104  
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
REFERENCE INPUTS  
Table 7.  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions/Comments  
DIFFERENTIAL OPERATION  
Frequency Range  
Sinusoidal Input  
LVPECL Input  
10  
0.002  
750  
1250  
MHz  
MHz  
The reference input divide-by-2 block must be  
engaged for fIN > 705 MHz  
LVDS Input  
0.002  
40  
750  
MHz  
V/ꢀs  
The reference input divide-by-2 block must be  
engaged for fIN > 705 MHz  
Minimum limit imposed for jitter performance  
Minimum Input Slew Rate  
Common-Mode Input Voltage  
AC-Coupled  
1.9  
1.0  
2
2.2  
2.4  
V
V
Internally generated  
DC-Coupled  
Differential Input Voltage Sensitivity  
mV  
Minimum differential voltage across pins is required to  
ensure switching between logic levels; instantaneous  
voltage on either pin must not exceed the supply rails  
fIN < 800 MHz  
240  
320  
400  
mV  
mV  
mV  
mV  
kΩ  
fIN = 800 to 1050 MHz  
fIN = 1050 to 1250 MHz  
Differential Input Voltage Hysteresis  
Input Resistance  
58  
21  
3
100  
Input Capacitance  
pF  
Minimum Pulse Width High  
LVPECL  
LVDS  
390  
640  
ps  
ps  
Minimum Pulse Width Low  
LVPECL  
LVDS  
390  
640  
ps  
ps  
SINGLE-ENDED OPERATION  
Frequency Range (CMOS)  
Minimum Input Slew Rate  
Input Voltage High (VIH)  
1.2 V to 1.5 V Threshold Setting  
1.8 V to 2.5 V Threshold Setting  
3.0 V to 3.3 V Threshold Setting  
Input Voltage Low (VIL)  
1.2 V to 1.5 V Threshold Setting  
1.8 V to 2.5 V Threshold Setting  
3.0 V to 3.3 V Threshold Setting  
Input Resistance  
0.002  
40  
300  
MHz  
V/ꢀs  
Minimum limit imposed for jitter performance  
1.0  
1.4  
2.0  
V
V
V
0.35  
0.5  
1.0  
V
V
V
kΩ  
pF  
ns  
ns  
47  
3
Input Capacitance  
Minimum Pulse Width High  
Minimum Pulse Width Low  
1.5  
1.5  
Rev. A | Page 7 of 104  
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
REFERENCE MONITORS  
Table 8.  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions/Comments  
REFERENCE MONITORS  
Reference Monitor  
Loss of Reference Detection Time  
1
1.1  
105  
DPLL PFD Nominal phase detector period = R/fREF  
period  
Δf/fREF  
(ppm)  
Frequency Out-of-Range Limits  
<2  
Programmable (lower bound is subject to quality  
of the system clock (SYSCLK)); SYSCLK accuracy  
must be better than the lower bound  
Validation Timer  
0.001  
65.535  
sec  
Programmable in 1 ms increments  
1 fREF is the frequency of the active reference; R is the frequency division factor determined by the R-divider.  
REFERENCE SWITCHOVER SPECIFICATIONS  
Table 9.  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions/Comments  
REFERENCE SWITCHOVER SPECIFICATIONS  
Maximum Output Phase Perturbation  
(Phase Build-Out Switchover)  
Assumes a jitter-free reference; satisfies Telcordia  
GR-1244-CORE requirements; select high PM base  
loop filter bit (Register 0x070E, Bit 0) is set to 1 for  
all active references  
50 Hz DPLL Loop Bandwidth  
Peak  
Steady State  
Valid for automatic and manual reference switching  
0
0
100  
100  
ps  
ps  
2 kHz DPLL Loop Bandwidth  
Peak  
Steady State  
Valid for automatic and manual reference switching  
0
0
250  
100  
ps  
ps  
Time Required to Switch to  
a New Reference  
Phase Build-Out Switchover  
1.1  
DPLL PFD Calculated using the nominal phase detector  
period  
period (NPDP = R/fREF); the total time required is  
equal to the time plus the reference validation  
time and the time required to lock to the new  
reference  
Rev. A | Page 8 of 104  
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
DISTRIBUTION CLOCK OUTPUTS  
Table 10.  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions/Comments  
HSTL MODE  
Output Frequency  
0.000352  
1250  
250  
MHz  
ps  
OUT5 only; OUT0 to OUT4 minimum output  
frequency is 360 kHz  
100 Ω termination across output pins  
Rise/Fall Time (20% to 80%)1  
Duty Cycle  
140  
Up to fOUT = 700 MHz  
Up to fOUT = 750 MHz  
Up to fOUT = 1250 MHz  
Differential Output Voltage Swing  
Common-Mode Output Voltage  
LVDS MODE  
45  
42  
48  
48  
43  
950  
870  
52  
53  
%
%
%
mV  
mV  
700  
700  
1200  
960  
Magnitude of voltage across pins; output driver static  
Output driver static  
Output Frequency  
0.000352  
1250  
280  
MHz  
ps  
OUT5 only; OUT0 to OUT4 minimum output  
frequency is 360 kHz  
100 Ω termination across the output pair  
Rise/Fall Time (20% to 80%)1  
Duty Cycle  
185  
Up to fOUT = 750 MHz  
Up to fOUT = 800 MHz  
Up to fOUT = 1250 MHz  
Differential Output Voltage Swing  
Balanced, VOD  
44  
43  
48  
47  
43  
53  
53  
%
%
%
247  
454  
50  
mV  
mV  
Voltage swing between output pins; output driver  
static  
Absolute difference between voltage swing of  
normal pin and inverted pin; output driver static  
Unbalanced, ΔVOD  
Offset Voltage  
Common-Mode, VOS  
Common-Mode Difference, ΔVOS  
Short-Circuit Output Current  
CMOS MODE  
1.125  
1.26  
13  
1.375  
50  
24  
V
mV  
mA  
Output driver static  
Voltage difference between pins; output driver static  
Output driver static  
Output Frequency  
OUT5 only; OUT0 to OUT4 minimum output  
frequency is 360 kHz  
1.8 V Supply  
0.000352  
150  
MHz  
10 pF load  
3.3 V Supply (OUT0 and OUT5)  
Strong Drive Strength Setting  
Weak Drive Strength Setting  
Rise/Fall Time (20% to 80%)1  
1.8 V Supply  
0.000352  
0.000352  
250  
25  
MHz  
MHz  
10 pF load  
10 pF load  
1.5  
3
ns  
10 pF load  
3.3 V Supply  
Strong Drive Strength Setting  
Weak Drive Strength Setting  
Duty Cycle  
0.4  
8
0.6  
ns  
ns  
10 pF load  
10 pF load  
1.8 V Mode  
3.3 V Strong Mode  
3.3 V Weak Mode  
50  
47  
51  
%
%
%
10 pF load  
10 pF load  
10 pF load  
Output Voltage High (VOH)  
AVDD3 = 3.3 V, IOH = 10 mA  
AVDD3 = 3.3 V, IOH = 1 mA  
AVDD3 = 1.8 V, IOH = 1 mA  
Output Voltage Low (VOL)  
AVDD3 = 3.3 V, IOL = 10 mA  
AVDD3 = 3.3 V, IOL = 1 mA  
AVDD3 = 1.8 V, IOL = 1 mA  
Output driver static; strong drive strength  
AVDD3 − 0.3  
AVDD3 − 0.1  
AVDD − 0.2  
V
V
V
Output driver static; strong drive strength  
0.3  
0.1  
0.1  
V
V
V
Rev. A | Page 9 of 104  
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions/Comments  
OUTPUT TIMING SKEW  
Between OUT0 and OUT1  
10 pF load  
10  
70  
ps  
ps  
ns  
ps  
HSTL mode on both drivers; rising edge only; any  
divide value  
HSTL mode on both drivers; rising edge only; any  
divide value  
HSTL mode on both drivers; rising edge only; any  
divide value  
HSTL mode on both drivers; rising edge only; any  
divide value  
Between OUT0 and OUT3  
Between OUT0 and OUT5  
105  
1.39  
1
222  
1.76  
12  
Between OUT1 and OUT2  
(OUT1 and OUT2 Share the  
Same Divider)  
Between OUT3 and OUT4  
(OUT3 and OUT4 Share the  
Same Divider)  
1
24  
ps  
HSTL mode on both drivers; rising edge only; any  
divide value  
Across All OUT0 to OUT4 HSTL  
105  
100  
235  
235  
ps  
ps  
HSTL mode on all drivers; rising edge only; any  
divide value  
LVDS mode on all drivers; rising edge only; any  
divide value  
Across All OUT0 to OUT4 LVDS  
Additional Delay on One Driver by  
Changing Its Logic Type  
HSTL to LVDS  
−5  
−5  
+1  
0
+5  
+5  
ps  
ps  
Positive value indicates that the LVDS edge is  
delayed relative to HSTL  
Positive value indicates that the CMOS edge is  
delayed relative to HSTL  
HSTL to 1.8 V CMOS  
HSTL to 3.3 V CMOS, Strong Mode  
OUT0 CMOS to OUT1 HSTL  
OUT0 CMOS to OUT3 HSTL  
OUT0 CMOS to OUT4 HSTL  
OUT0 CMOS to OUT5 HSTL  
The CMOS edge is delayed relative to HSTL  
3.53  
3.55  
3.56  
4.84  
3.59  
3.65  
3.68  
5.1  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
1 The listed values are for the slower edge (rise or fall).  
TIME DURATION OF DIGITAL FUNCTIONS  
Table 11.  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions/Comments  
TIME DURATION OF DIGITAL  
FUNCTIONS  
EEPROM-to-Register Download  
Time  
Register-to-EEPROM Upload Time  
13  
138  
1
20  
ms  
ms  
ms  
Using default EEPROM storage sequence  
(see Register 0x0E10 to Register 0x0E3F)  
Using default EEPROM storage sequence  
(see Register 0x0E10 to Register 0x0E3F)  
Time from power-down exit to system clock  
lock detect  
145  
Minimum Power-Down Exit Time  
Rev. A | Page 10 of 104  
 
 
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
DIGITAL PLL  
Table 12.  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions/Comments  
DIGITAL PLL  
Phase-Frequency Detector (PFD)  
Input Frequency Range  
2
100  
kHz  
Loop Bandwidth  
Phase Margin  
Closed-Loop Peaking  
0.1  
30  
<0.1  
2000  
89  
Hz  
Degrees  
dB  
Programmable design parameter  
Programmable design parameter  
Programmable design parameter ;  
part can be programmed for <0.1 dB peaking in  
accordance with Telcordia GR-253 jitter transfer  
1, 2, …, 1,048,576  
Reference Input (R) Division Factor  
1
220  
217  
Integer Feedback (N1) Division Factor 180  
180, 181, …, 131,072  
Fractional Feedback Divide Ratio  
0
0.999  
Maximum value: 16,777,215/16,777,216  
DIGITAL PLL LOCK DETECTION  
Table 13.  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
1
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions/Comments  
PHASE LOCK DETECTOR  
Threshold Programming Range  
Threshold Resolution  
FREQUENCY LOCK DETECTOR  
Threshold Programming Range  
Threshold Resolution  
0.001  
65.5  
ns  
ps  
0.001  
16,700  
ns  
ps  
Reference-to-feedback period difference  
1
HOLDOVER SPECIFICATIONS  
Table 14.  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions/Comments  
HOLDOVER SPECIFICATIONS  
Initial Frequency Accuracy  
<0.01  
ppm  
Excludes frequency drift of SYSCLK source;  
excludes frequency drift of input reference prior  
to entering holdover; compliant with GR-1244  
Stratum 3  
Rev. A | Page 11 of 104  
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
SERIAL PORT SPECIFICATIONS—SPI MODE  
Table 15.  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions/Comments  
CS  
Input Logic 1 Voltage  
Input Logic 0 Voltage  
Input Logic 1 Current  
Input Logic 0 Current  
Input Capacitance  
SCLK  
2.0  
0.8  
60  
100  
2
V
V
μA  
μA  
pF  
Internal 30 kΩ pull-down resistor  
Input Logic 1 Voltage  
Input Logic 0 Voltage  
Input Logic 1 Current  
Input Logic 0 Current  
Input Capacitance  
SDIO  
2.0  
0.8  
200  
1
V
V
μA  
μA  
pF  
2
As an Input  
Input Logic 1 Voltage  
Input Logic 0 Voltage  
Input Logic 1 Current  
Input Logic 0 Current  
Input Capacitance  
As an Output  
2.0  
0.8  
1
1
2
V
V
μA  
μA  
pF  
Output Logic 1 Voltage  
Output Logic 0 Voltage  
SDO  
Output Logic 1 Voltage  
Output Logic 0 Voltage  
TIMING  
DVDD3 − 0.6  
DVDD3 − 0.6  
V
V
1 mA load current  
1 mA load current  
0.4  
0.4  
40  
V
V
1 mA load current  
1 mA load current  
SCLK  
Clock Rate, 1/tCLK  
Pulse Width High, tHIGH  
Pulse Width Low, tLOW  
SDIO to SCLK Setup, tDS  
SCLK to SDIO Hold, tDH  
SCLK to Valid SDIO and SDO, tDV  
CS to SCLK Setup (tS)  
CS to SCLK Hold (tC)  
CS Minimum Pulse Width High  
MHz  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
10  
13  
3
6
10  
ns  
ns  
10  
0
ns  
6
ns  
Rev. A | Page 12 of 104  
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
SERIAL PORT SPECIFICATIONS—I2C MODE  
Table 16.  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions/Comments  
SDA, SCL (AS INPUT)  
Input Logic 1 Voltage  
0.7 ×  
V
DVDD3  
Input Logic 0 Voltage  
0.3 ×  
V
DVDD3  
Input Current  
−10  
+10  
μA  
For VIN = 10% to 90% DVDD3  
Hysteresis of Schmitt Trigger Inputs  
0.015 ×  
DVDD3  
Pulse Width of Spikes That Must Be Suppressed by  
the Input Filter, tSP  
50  
ns  
SDA (AS OUTPUT)  
Output Logic 0 Voltage  
0.4  
V
IO = 3 mA  
Output Fall Time from VIHmin to VILmax  
20 + 0.1  
Cb  
250  
ns  
10 pF ≤ Cb ≤ 400 pF  
1
TIMING  
SCL Clock Rate  
Bus-Free Time Between a Stop and Start  
Condition, tBUF  
400  
kHz  
μs  
1.3  
Repeated Start Condition Setup Time, tSU; STA  
Repeated Hold Time Start Condition, tHD; STA  
0.6  
0.6  
μs  
μs  
After this period, the first clock pulse is  
generated  
Stop Condition Setup Time, tSU; STO  
Low Period of the SCL Clock, tLOW  
High Period of the SCL Clock, tHIGH  
SCL/SDA Rise Time, tR  
SCL/SDA Fall Time, tF  
Data Setup Time, tSU; DAT  
0.6  
1.3  
0.6  
20 + 0.1 Cb  
20 + 0.1 Cb  
100  
μs  
μs  
μs  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
pF  
1
1
300  
300  
Data Hold Time, tHD; DAT  
Capacitive Load for Each Bus Line, Cb  
100  
1
400  
1 Cb is the capacitance (pF) of a single bus line.  
JITTER GENERATION  
Jitter generation (random jitter) uses 49.152 MHz crystal for system clock input.  
Table 17.  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions/Comments  
JITTER GENERATION  
System clock doubler enabled;  
high phase margin mode enabled;  
Register 0x0405 = 0x20; Register 0x0403 =  
0x07; Register 0x0400 = 0x81;  
in cases where multiple driver types are  
listed, both driver types were tested at  
those conditions, and the one with higher  
jitter is quoted, although there is usually  
not a significant jitter difference between  
the driver types  
fREF = 19.44 MHz; fOUT = 622.08 MHz; fLOOP = 50 Hz  
HSTL Driver  
Bandwidth: 5 kHz to 20 MHz  
Bandwidth: 12 kHz to 20 MHz  
Bandwidth: 20 kHz to 80 MHz  
Bandwidth: 50 kHz to 80 MHz  
Bandwidth: 16 MHz to 320 MHz  
304  
296  
300  
266  
185  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
Rev. A | Page 13 of 104  
 
 
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions/Comments  
fREF = 19.44 MHz; fOUT = 644.53 MHz; fLOOP = 50 Hz  
HSTL and/or LVDS Driver  
Bandwidth: 5 kHz to 20 MHz  
Bandwidth: 12 kHz to 20 MHz  
Bandwidth: 20 kHz to 80 MHz  
Bandwidth: 50 kHz to 80 MHz  
Bandwidth: 16 MHz to 320 MHz  
334  
321  
319  
277  
185  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fREF = 19.44 MHz; fOUT = 693.48 MHz; fLOOP = 50 Hz  
HSTL Driver  
Bandwidth: 5 kHz to 20 MHz  
Bandwidth: 12 kHz to 20 MHz  
Bandwidth: 20 kHz to 80 MHz  
Bandwidth: 50 kHz to 80 MHz  
Bandwidth: 16 MHz to 320 MHz  
298  
285  
286  
252  
183  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fREF = 19.44 MHz; fOUT = 174.703 MHz; fLOOP = 1 kHz  
HSTL Driver  
Bandwidth: 5 kHz to 20 MHz  
Bandwidth: 12 kHz to 20 MHz  
Bandwidth: 20 kHz to 80 MHz  
Bandwidth: 50 kHz to 80 MHz  
Bandwidth: 4 MHz to 80 MHz  
354  
301  
321  
290  
177  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fREF = 19.44 MHz; fOUT = 174.703 MHz; fLOOP = 100 Hz  
LVDS and/or 3.3 V CMOS Driver  
Bandwidth: 5 kHz to 20 MHz  
Bandwidth: 12 kHz to 20 MHz  
Bandwidth: 20 kHz to 80 MHz  
Bandwidth: 50 kHz to 80 MHz  
Bandwidth: 4 MHz to 80 MHz  
306  
293  
313  
283  
166  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fREF = 25 MHz; fOUT = 161.1328 MHz; fLOOP = 100 Hz  
HSTL Driver  
Bandwidth: 5 kHz to 20 MHz  
Bandwidth: 12 kHz to 20 MHz  
Bandwidth: 20 kHz to 80 MHz  
Bandwidth: 50 kHz to 80 MHz  
Bandwidth: 4 MHz to 80 MHz  
316  
302  
324  
292  
171  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fREF = 2 kHz; fOUT = 70.656 MHz; fLOOP = 100 Hz;  
HSTL and/or 3.3 V CMOS Driver  
Bandwidth: 10 Hz to 30 MHz  
3.22  
ps  
rms  
Bandwidth: 5 kHz to 20 MHz  
Bandwidth: 12 kHz to 20 MHz  
Bandwidth: 10 kHz to 400 kHz  
Bandwidth: 100 kHz to 10 MHz  
338  
324  
278  
210  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fREF = 25 MHz; fOUT = 1 GHz; fLOOP = 500 Hz  
HSTL Driver  
Bandwidth: 100 Hz to 500 MHz (Broadband)  
1.71  
ps  
rms  
Bandwidth: 12 kHz to 20 MHz  
Bandwidth: 20 kHz to 80 MHz  
343  
338  
fs rms  
fs rms  
Rev. A | Page 14 of 104  
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
Jitter generation (random jitter) uses 19.2 MHz TCXO for system clock input.  
Table 18.  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions/Comments  
JITTER GENERATION  
System clock doubler enabled; high phase  
margin mode enabled; Register 0x0405 = 0x20;  
Register 0x0403 = 0x07; Register 0x0400 = 0x81;  
in cases where multiple driver types are listed,  
both driver types were tested at those conditions,  
and the one with higher jitter is quoted, although  
there is usually not a significant jitter difference  
between the driver types  
fREF = 19.44 MHz; fOUT = 644.53 MHz; fLOOP = 0.1 Hz  
HSTL Driver  
Bandwidth: 5 kHz to 20 MHz  
Bandwidth: 12 kHz to 20 MHz  
Bandwidth: 20 kHz to 80 MHz  
Bandwidth: 50 kHz to 80 MHz  
Bandwidth: 16 MHz to 320 MHz  
402  
393  
391  
347  
179  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fREF = 19.44 MHz; fOUT = 693.48 MHz; fLOOP = 0.1 Hz  
HSTL Driver  
Bandwidth: 5 kHz to 20 MHz  
Bandwidth: 12 kHz to 20 MHz  
Bandwidth: 20 kHz to 80 MHz  
Bandwidth: 50 kHz to 80 MHz  
Bandwidth: 16 MHz to 320 MHz  
379  
371  
371  
335  
175  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fREF = 19.44 MHz; fOUT = 312.5 MHz; fLOOP = 0.1 Hz  
HSTL Driver  
Bandwidth: 5 kHz to 20 MHz  
Bandwidth: 12 kHz to 20 MHz  
Bandwidth: 20 kHz to 80 MHz  
Bandwidth: 50 kHz to 80 MHz  
Bandwidth: 4 MHz to 80 MHz  
413  
404  
407  
358  
142  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fREF = 25 MHz; fOUT = 161.1328 MHz; fLOOP = 0.1 Hz  
HSTL Driver  
Bandwidth: 5 kHz to 20 MHz  
Bandwidth: 12 kHz to 20 MHz  
Bandwidth: 20 kHz to 80 MHz  
Bandwidth: 50 kHz to 80 MHz  
Bandwidth: 4 MHz to 80 MHz  
399  
391  
414  
376  
190  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fREF = 2 kHz; fOUT = 70.656 MHz; fLOOP = 0.1 Hz  
HSTL and/or 3.3 V CMOS Driver  
Bandwidth: 10 Hz to 30 MHz  
Bandwidth: 12 kHz to 20 MHz  
Bandwidth: 10 kHz to 400 kHz  
Bandwidth: 100 kHz to 10 MHz  
970  
404  
374  
281  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
fs rms  
Rev. A | Page 15 of 104  
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS  
Table 19.  
Stresses above those listed under Absolute Maximum Ratings  
may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress  
rating only; functional operation of the device at these or any  
other conditions above those indicated in the operational  
section of this specification is not implied. Exposure to absolute  
maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect  
device reliability.  
Parameter  
Rating  
Analog Supply Voltage (AVDD)  
Digital Supply Voltage (DVDD)  
Digital I/O Supply Voltage (DVDD3)  
Analog Supply Voltage (AVDD3)  
Maximum Digital Input Voltage  
Storage Temperature Range  
Operating Temperature Range  
2 V  
2 V  
3.6 V  
3.6 V  
−0.5 V to DVDD3 + 0.5 V  
−65°C to +150°C  
−40°C to +85°C  
300°C  
ESD CAUTION  
Lead Temperature  
(Soldering 10 sec)  
Junction Temperature  
150°C  
Rev. A | Page 16 of 104  
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
PIN CONFIGURATION AND FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS  
PIN 1  
INDICATOR  
IRQ  
SCLK/SCL  
SDIO/SDA  
SDO  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
48 REFC  
47 REFC  
46 DVDD3  
45 DVDD3  
44 REFA  
43 REFA  
42 SYNC  
41 M7  
40 PINCONTROL  
39 RESET  
38 AVDD  
37 AVDD  
36 NC  
CS  
DVDD  
AVDD  
XOA  
XOB  
AVDD 10  
NC 11  
AVDD 12  
OUT4 13  
OUT4 14  
OUT3 15  
OUT3 16  
AD9558  
TOP VIEW  
(Not to Scale)  
35 AVDD  
34 NC  
33 LF_VCO2  
NOTES  
1. NC = NO CONNECT. DO NOT CONNECT TO THIS PIN.  
2. THE EXPOSED PAD MUST BE CONNECTED TO GROUND (VSS).  
Figure 2. Pin Configuration  
Table 20. Pin Function Descriptions  
Input/  
Output Pin Type  
Pin No. Mnemonic  
Description  
1
2
IRQ  
SCLK/SCL  
O
I
3.3 V CMOS  
3.3 V CMOS  
Interrupt Request Line.  
Serial Programming Clock (SCLK) in SPI Mode. Data clock for serial programming.  
Open-Collector Serial Clock Pin (SCL) in I2C Mode. Requires a pull-up resistor, usually  
2.2 kΩ; the resistor size depends on the number of I2C devices on the bus.  
3
SDIO/SDA  
I/O  
3.3 V CMOS  
Serial Data Input/Output (SDIO) in SPI Mode. When the device is in 4-wire SPI mode,  
data is written via this pin. In 3-wire SPI mode, both data reads and writes occur on  
this pin. There is no internal pull-up/pull-down resistor on this pin.  
Open-Collector Serial Data Pin (SDA) in I2C Mode. Requires a pull-up resistor, usually  
2.2 kΩ; the resistor size depends on the number of I2C devices on the bus.  
4
5
SDO  
CS  
O
I
3.3 V CMOS  
3.3 V CMOS  
Serial Data Output. Use this pin to read data in 4-wire mode. There is no internal pull-up/  
pull-down resistor on this pin. This pin is high impedance in the default 3-wire mode.  
Chip Select (SPI), Active Low. When programming a device, this pin must be held low.  
In systems where more than one AD9558 is present, this pin enables individual  
programming of each AD9558. This pin has an internal 10 kΩ pull-up resistor.  
6, 55, 56 DVDD  
I
I
I
Power  
Power  
Differential  
input  
1.8 V Digital Supply.  
1.8 V Analog (SYSCLK) Power Supply.  
System Clock Input. XOA contains internal dc biasing and should be ac-coupled with  
a 0.01 ꢀF capacitor, except when using a crystal. If a crystal is used, connect the crystal  
across XOA and XOB. Single-ended 1.8 V CMOS is also an option but can introduce  
a spur if the duty cycle is not 50%. When using XOA as a single-ended input, connect  
a 0.01 ꢀF capacitor from XOB to ground.  
7
8
AVDD  
XOA  
9
XOB  
I
Differential  
input  
Complementary System Clock Input. Complementary signal to XOA. XOB contains  
internal dc biasing and should be ac-coupled with a 0.01 ꢀF capacitor, except when  
using a crystal. If a crystal is used, connect the crystal across XOA and XOB.  
10  
11  
12, 17,  
22, 29,  
30  
AVDD  
NC  
AVDD  
I
I
I
Power  
Power  
1.8 V Analog (VCO) Power Supply.  
No Connection. Do not connect to this pin.  
1.8 V Analog (Output Driver) Power Supply.  
Rev. A | Page 17 of 104  
 
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
Input/  
Output Pin Type  
Pin No. Mnemonic  
Description  
13  
OUT4  
O
HSTL, LVDS, or Complementary Output 4. This output can be configured as HSTL, LVDS, or single-ended  
1.8 V CMOS  
1.8 V CMOS.  
14  
OUT4  
O
HSTL, LVDS,  
Output 4. This output can be configured as HSTL, LVDS, or single-ended 1.8 V CMOS.  
or 1.8 V CMOS LVPECL levels can be achieved by ac coupling and using the Thevenin-equivalent  
termination as described in the Input/Output Termination Recommendations section.  
15  
16  
OUT3  
OUT3  
O
O
HSTL, LVDS, or Complementary Output 3. This output can be configured as HSTL, LVDS,  
1.8 V CMOS  
or single-ended 1.8 V CMOS.  
HSTL, LVDS, or Output 3. This output can be configured as HSTL, LVDS, or single-ended 1.8 V CMOS.  
1.8 V CMOS  
LVPECL levels can be achieved by ac coupling and using the Thevenin-equivalent  
termination as described in the Input/Output Termination Recommendations section.  
18  
19  
OUT2  
OUT2  
O
O
HSTL, LVDS, or Complementary Output 2. This output can be configured as HSTL, LVDS, or  
1.8 V CMOS single-ended 1.8 V CMOS.  
HSTL, LVDS, or Output 2. This output can be HSTL, LVDS, or single-ended 1.8 V CMOS.  
1.8 V CMOS  
LVPECL levels can be achieved by ac coupling and using the Thevenin-equivalent  
termination as described in the Input/Output Termination Recommendations section.  
20  
21  
OUT1  
OUT1  
O
O
HSTL, LVDS, or Complementary Output 1. This output can be configured as HSTL, LVDS, or  
1.8 V CMOS  
single-ended 1.8 V CMOS.  
HSTL, LVDS,  
Output 1. This output can be configured as HSTL, LVDS, or single-ended 1.8 V CMOS.  
or 1.8 V CMOS LVPECL levels can be achieved by ac coupling and using the Thevenin-equivalent  
termination as described in the Input/Output Termination Recommendations section.  
23  
24  
OUT5  
OUT5  
O
O
HSTL, LVDS,  
1.8 V CMOS,  
3.3 V CMOS  
HSTL, LVDS,  
1.8 V CMOS,  
3.3 V CMOS  
Complementary Output 5. This output can be configured as HSTL, LVDS, or single-ended  
1.8 V or 3.3 V CMOS.  
Output 5. This output can be configured as HSTL, LVDS, or single-ended 1.8 V or 3.3 V  
CMOS. LVPECL levels can be achieved by ac coupling and by using the Thevenin-  
equivalent termination as described in the Input/Output Termination  
Recommendations section.  
25, 26  
27  
AVDD3  
OUT0  
I
O
Power  
3.3 V Analog (Output Driver) Power Supply.  
Complementary Output 0. This output can be configured as HSTL, LVDS, or single-  
ended 1.8 V or 3.3 V CMOS.  
HSTL, LVDS,  
1.8 V CMOS,  
3.3 V CMOS  
28  
OUT0  
O
HSTL, LVDS,  
1.8 V CMOS,  
3.3 V CMOS  
Output 0. This output can be configured as HSTL, LVDS, or single-ended 1.8 V or 3.3 V  
CMOS. LVPECL levels can be achieved by ac coupling and by using the Thevenin-  
equivalent termination as described in the Input/Output Termination  
Recommendations section.  
31  
32  
AVDD3  
LDO_VCO2  
I
I
Power  
LDO bypass  
3.3V Analog (VCO 2) Power Supply.  
Output PLL Loop Filter Voltage Regulator. Connect a 0.47 ꢀF capacitor from this pin  
to ground. This pin is also the ac ground reference for the integrated output PLL  
external loop filter.  
33  
LF_VCO2  
I/O  
I
Loop filter  
Power  
Loop Filter Node for the Output PLL. Connect an external 6.8 nF capacitor from this  
pin to Pin 32 (LDO_VCO2).  
No Connect. There is no internal connection for this pin.  
1.8 V Analog (APLL) Power Supply.  
No Connect. There is no internal connection for this pin.  
1.8 V Analog (DCO and TDC) Power Supplies.  
Chip Reset. When this active low pin is asserted, the chip goes into reset. This pin has  
an internal 50 kΩ pull-up resistor.  
34  
35  
36  
37, 38  
39  
NC  
AVDD  
NC  
AVDD  
RESET  
I
I
Power  
3.3 V CMOS  
40  
PINCONTROL  
I
3.3 V CMOS  
Pin Program Mode Enable Pin. When pulled high during startup, this pin enables pin  
programming of the AD9558 configuration during startup. If this pin is low during  
startup, the user must program the part via the serial port, or use values that are  
stored in the EEPROM.  
41  
42  
M7  
I/O  
I
3.3 V CMOS  
3.3 V CMOS  
Configurable I/O Pin. Along with pins M6 through M0, this pin is configured through  
the AD9558 register space.  
Clock Distribution Synchronization Pin. When this pin is activated, output drivers are  
held static and then synchronized on a low-to-high transition of this pin. This pin is  
used to arm the frame sync function when frame sync mode is enabled and has an  
internal 60 kΩ pull-up resistor.  
SYNC  
Rev. A | Page 18 of 104  
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
Input/  
Output Pin Type  
Pin No. Mnemonic  
Description  
43  
44  
REFA  
I
Differential  
input  
Reference A Input. This internally biased input is typically ac-coupled and, when  
configured as such, can accept any differential signal with single-ended swing up  
to 3.3 V. If dc-coupled, input can be LVPECL, LVDS, or single-ended CMOS.  
REFA  
I
I
I
Differential  
input  
Power  
Complementary Reference A Input. This pin is the complementary input to Pin 43.  
45, 46,  
51, 52  
47  
DVDD3  
REFC  
3.3 V Digital (Reference Input) Power Supply.  
Differential  
input  
Reference C Input. This internally biased input is typically ac-coupled and, when  
configured as such, can accept any differential signal with single-ended swing up  
to 3.3 V. If dc-coupled, input can be LVPECL, LVDS, or single-ended CMOS.  
48  
49  
REFC  
REFD  
I
I
Differential  
input  
Differential  
input  
Complementary Reference C Input. This pin is the complementary input to Pin 47.  
Reference D Input. This internally biased input is typically ac-coupled and, when  
configured as such, can accept any differential signal with single-ended swing up  
to 3.3 V. If dc-coupled, input can be LVPECL, LVDS, or single-ended CMOS.  
50  
53  
REFD  
REFB  
I
I
Differential  
input  
Differential  
input  
Complementary Reference D Input. This pin is the complementary input to Pin 49.  
Reference B Input. This internally biased input is typically ac-coupled and, when  
configured as such, can accept any differential signal with single-ended swing up  
to 3.3 V. If dc-coupled, input can be LVPECL, LVDS, or single-ended CMOS.  
54  
REFB  
I
Differential  
input  
Complementary Reference B Input. This pin is the complementary input to Pin 53.  
57, 58,  
59, 60,  
61, 62,  
63  
M0, M1, M2,  
M3, M4, M5,  
M6  
I/O  
3.3 V CMOS  
Configurable I/O Pins. These pins are configured under program control. The M7 pin  
(Pin 41) is the last pin of this group.  
64  
EP  
DVDD3  
VSS  
I
O
Power  
Exposed pad  
3.3 V Digital Supply.  
The exposed pad must be connected to ground (VSS).  
Rev. A | Page 19 of 104  
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
TYPICAL PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS  
fR = input reference clock frequency; fOUT = output clock frequency; fSYS = SYSCLK input frequency; fS = internal system clock frequency;  
LF = SYSCLK PLL internal loop filter used. AVDD, AVDD3, and DVDD at nominal supply voltage; fS = 786.432 MHz, unless otherwise noted.  
–60  
–60  
INTEGRATED RMS JITTER (12kHz TO 20MHz): 296fs  
INTEGRATED RMS JITTER (12kHz TO 20MHz): 285fs  
–70  
–70  
–80  
–80  
–90  
–90  
–100  
–110  
–120  
–130  
–140  
–150  
–160  
–100  
–110  
–120  
–130  
–140  
–150  
–160  
100  
1k  
10k  
100k  
1M  
10M  
100M  
100  
1k  
10k  
100k  
1M  
10M  
100M  
FREQUENCY OFFSET (Hz)  
FREQUENCY OFFSET (Hz)  
Figure 3. Absolute Phase Noise (Output Driver = HSTL),  
fR = 19.44 MHz, fOUT = 622.08 MHz,  
Figure 5. Absolute Phase Noise (Output Driver = HSTL),  
fR = 19.44 MHz, fOUT = 693.482991 MHz,  
DPLL Loop BW = 50 Hz, fSYS = 49.152 MHz Crystal  
DPLL Loop BW = 50 Hz, fSYS = 49.152 MHz Crystal  
–60  
–70  
–70  
–80  
INTEGRATED RMS JITTER (12kHz TO 20MHz): 320fs  
INTEGRATED RMS JITTER (12kHz TO 20MHz): 301fs  
–80  
–90  
–90  
–100  
–110  
–120  
–130  
–140  
–150  
–160  
–100  
–110  
–120  
–130  
–140  
–150  
–160  
100  
1k  
10k  
100k  
1M  
10M  
100M  
100  
1k  
10k  
100k  
1M  
10M  
100M  
FREQUENCY OFFSET (Hz)  
FREQUENCY OFFSET (Hz)  
Figure 6. Absolute Phase Noise (Output Driver = HSTL),  
fR = 19.44 MHz, fOUT = 174.703 MHz,  
DPLL Loop BW = 1 kHz, fSYS = 49.152 MHz Crystal  
Figure 4. Absolute Phase Noise (Output Driver = HSTL),  
fR = 19.44 MHz, fOUT = 644.53125 MHz,  
DPLL Loop BW = 50 Hz, fSYS = 49.152 MHz Crystal  
Rev. A | Page 20 of 104  
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
–80  
–60  
–70  
INTEGRATED RMS JITTER (12kHz TO 20MHz): 302fs  
INTEGRATED RMS JITTER (12kHz TO 20MHz): 393fs  
–90  
–100  
–110  
–120  
–130  
–140  
–150  
–160  
–80  
–90  
–100  
–110  
–120  
–130  
–140  
–150  
–160  
100  
1k  
10k  
100k  
1M  
10M  
100M  
10  
100  
1k  
10k  
100k  
1M  
10M  
100M  
FREQUENCY OFFSET (Hz)  
FREQUENCY OFFSET (Hz)  
Figure 7. Absolute Phase Noise (Output Driver = 3.3.V CMOS),  
fR = 19.44 MHz, fOUT = 161.1328125 MHz,  
Figure 10. Absolute Phase Noise (Output Driver = HSTL),  
fR = 19.44 MHz, fOUT = 644.53 MHz,  
DPLL Loop BW = 100 Hz, fSYS = 49.152 MHz Crystal  
DPLL Loop BW = 0.1 Hz, fSYS = 19.2 MHz TCXO  
–60  
–70  
–80  
–90  
–70  
–80  
INTEGRATED RMS JITTER (12kHz TO 20MHz): 371s  
INTEGRATED RMS JITTER (12kHz TO 20MHz): 308fs  
–90  
–100  
–110  
–120  
–130  
–140  
–150  
–160  
–100  
–110  
–120  
–130  
–140  
–150  
–160  
10  
100  
1k  
10k  
100k  
1M  
10M  
100M  
100  
1k  
10k  
100k  
1M  
10M  
100M  
FREQUENCY OFFSET (Hz)  
FREQUENCY OFFSET (Hz)  
Figure 8. Absolute Phase Noise (Output Driver = HSTL),  
fR = 2 kHz, fOUT = 125 MHz,  
Figure 11. Absolute Phase Noise (Output Driver = HSTL),  
fR = 19.44 MHz, fOUT = 693.482991 MHz,  
DPLL Loop BW = 100 Hz, fSYS = 49.152 MHz Crystal  
DPLL Loop BW = 0.1 Hz, fSYS = 19.2 MHz TCXO  
–60  
–70  
–70  
–80  
INTEGRATED RMS JITTER (12kHz TO 20MHz): 404fs  
INTEGRATED RMS JITTER (12kHz TO 20MHz): 343fs  
–80  
–90  
–90  
–100  
–110  
–120  
–130  
–140  
–150  
–160  
–100  
–110  
–120  
–130  
–140  
–150  
–160  
100  
1k  
10k  
100k  
1M  
10M  
100M  
10  
100  
1k  
10k  
100k  
1M  
10M  
100M  
FREQUENCY OFFSET (Hz)  
FREQUENCY OFFSET (Hz)  
Figure 9. Absolute Phase Noise (Output Driver = HSTL),  
fR = 25 MHz, fOUT = 1 GHz,  
Figure 12. Absolute Phase Noise (Output Driver = HSTL),  
fR = 19.44 MHz, fOUT = 312.5 MHz,  
DPLL Loop BW = 500 Hz, fSYS = 49.152 MHz Crystal  
DPLL Loop BW = 0.1 Hz, fSYS = 19.2 MHz TCXO  
Rev. A | Page 21 of 104  
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
2.0  
1.9  
1.8  
1.7  
1.6  
1.5  
1.4  
1.3  
1.2  
1.1  
1.0  
–70  
INTEGRATED RMS JITTER (12kHz TO 20MHz): 391fs  
–80  
–90  
–100  
–110  
–120  
–130  
–140  
–150  
–160  
10  
100  
1k  
10k  
100k  
1M  
10M  
100M  
FREQUENCY OFFSET (Hz)  
FREQUENCY (MHz)  
Figure 13. Absolute Phase Noise (Output Driver = 3.3 V CMOS),  
fR = 19.44 MHz, fOUT =161.1328125 MHz,  
Figure 16. Amplitude vs. Toggle Rate,  
HSTL Mode (LVPECL-Compatible Mode)  
DPLL Loop BW = 0.1 Hz, fSYS = 19.2 MHz TCXO  
1.0  
–70  
INTEGRATED RMS JITTER (12kHz TO 20MHz): 395fs  
–80  
–90  
0.9  
0.8  
0.7  
0.6  
0.5  
0.4  
LVDS BOOST MODE  
LVDS DEFAULT  
–100  
–110  
–120  
–130  
–140  
–150  
–160  
0
100  
200  
300  
400  
500  
600  
700  
800  
10  
100  
1k  
10k  
100k  
1M  
10M  
100M  
FREQUENCY OFFSET (Hz)  
FREQUENCY (MHz)  
Figure 17. Amplitude vs. Toggle Rate, LVDS  
Figure 14. Absolute Phase Noise (Output Driver = 1.8 V CMOS),  
fR = 2 kHz, fOUT = 70.656 MHz,  
DPLL Loop BW = 0.1 Hz, fSYS = 19.2 MHz TCXO  
–60  
3.5  
3.0  
2.5  
2.0  
1.5  
1.0  
INTEGRATED RMS JITTER (12kHz TO 20MHz): 388fs  
3.3V CMOS  
–70  
–80  
–90  
–100  
–110  
–120  
–130  
–140  
–150  
–160  
1.8V CMOS  
0
50  
100  
150  
200  
250  
300  
10  
100  
1k  
10k  
100k  
1M  
10M  
100M  
FREQUENCY OFFSET (Hz)  
FREQUENCY (MHz)  
Figure 15. Absolute Phase Noise (Output Driver = HSTL),  
fR = 19.44 MHz, fOUT = 644.53 MHz, fSYS = 19.2 MHz TCXO  
Holdover Mode  
Figure 18. Amplitude vs. Toggle Rate with 10 pF Load,  
3.3 V (Strong Mode) and 1.8 V CMOS  
Rev. A | Page 22 of 104  
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
3.5  
3.0  
2.5  
2.0  
1.5  
1.0  
0.5  
0
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
1.8V CMOS MODE  
3.3V CMOS STRONG MODE  
3.3V CMOS WEAK MODE  
0
50  
100  
150  
200  
0
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
FREQUENCY (MHz)  
FREQUENCY (MHz)  
Figure 19. Amplitude vs. Toggle Rate with 10 pF Load,  
3.3 V (Weak Mode) CMOS  
Figure 22. Power Consumption vs. Frequency, One CMOS Driver on Output  
Driver Power Supply Only (Pin 12, Pin 17, Pin 22, and Pin 29) for 1.8 V CMOS Mode,  
or on Pin 25 and Pin 26 for 3.3 V CMOS Mode  
1.0  
0.8  
110  
105  
100  
95  
90  
85  
80  
75  
70  
65  
60  
55  
50  
45  
40  
35  
30  
0.6  
OUTPUT CHANNEL 1 OR 2:  
BOTH HSTL DRIVERS ENABLED  
0.4  
0.2  
OUTPUT CHANNEL 1 OR 2:  
ONE HSTL DRIVER ENABLED  
0
–0.2  
–0.4  
–0.6  
–0.8  
–1.0  
OUTPUT CHANNEL 0 OR 3:  
HSTL DRIVER ENABLED  
–1  
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
250  
500  
750  
1000  
1250  
FREQUENCY (MHz)  
TIME (ns)  
Figure 23. Output Waveform, HSTL (400 MHz)  
Figure 20. Power Consumption vs. Frequency,  
HSTL Mode (Single Channel) on 1.8 V Output Driver Power Supply Only  
(Pin 12, Pin 17, Pin 22, and Pin29)  
0.4  
65  
60  
0.3  
0.2  
OUTPUT CHANNEL 1 OR 2:  
55  
BOTH LVDS DRIVERS ENABLED  
50  
45  
40  
35  
0.1  
0
OUTPUT CHANNEL 1 OR 2:  
ONE LVDS DRIVER ENABLED  
30  
25  
–0.1  
–0.2  
–0.3  
–0.4  
OUTPUT CHANNEL 0 OR 3:  
LVDS DRIVER ENABLED  
20  
15  
10  
5
0
–1  
0
1
2
3
4
0
100  
200  
300  
400  
500  
600  
700  
800  
FREQUENCY (MHz)  
TIME (ns)  
Figure 24. Output Waveform, LVDS (400 MHz)  
Figure 21. LVDS Power Consumption vs. Frequency on 1.8 V Output Driver  
Power Supply Only (Pin 12, Pin 17, Pin 22, and Pin 29)  
Rev. A | Page 23 of 104  
 
 
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
3
0
3.4  
3.0  
2.6  
2.2  
1.8  
1.4  
1.0  
0.6  
0.2  
–3  
–6  
–9  
–12  
–15  
–18  
–21  
–24  
–27  
–30  
LOOP BW = 100Hz;  
HIGH PHASE MARGIN;  
PEAKING: 0.06dB; –3dB: 69Hz  
2pF LOAD  
10pF LOAD  
LOOP BW = 2kHz;  
HIGH PHASE MARGIN;  
PEAKING: 0.097dB; –3dB: 1.23kHz  
LOOP BW = 5kHz;  
HIGH PHASE MARGIN;  
PEAKING: 0.14dB; –3dB: 4.27kHz  
–0.2  
–1  
10  
100  
1k  
FREQUENCY OFFSET (Hz)  
10k  
100k  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15  
TIME (ns)  
Figure 25. Output Waveform,  
3.3 V CMOS (100 MHz, Strong Mode)  
Figure 28. Closed-Loop Transfer Function for 100 Hz, 2 kHz, and 5 kHz Loop  
Bandwidth Settings; High Phase Margin Loop Filter Setting  
(This is compliant with Telcordia GR-253 jitter transfer test for loop  
bandwidths < 2 kHz.)  
1.9  
1.7  
1.5  
1.3  
1.1  
0.9  
0.7  
0.5  
0.3  
0.1  
3
0
–3  
–6  
–9  
–12  
–15  
–18  
–21  
LOOP BW = 100Hz;  
2pF LOAD  
10pF LOAD  
NORMAL PHASE MARGIN;  
–24  
PEAKING: 0.09dB; –3dB: 117Hz  
LOOP BW = 2kHz;  
NORMAL PHASE MARGIN;  
–27  
PEAKING: 1.6dB; –3dB: 2.69kHz  
–0.1  
–1  
–30  
10  
100  
1k  
10k  
100k  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15  
FREQUENCY OFFSET (Hz)  
TIME (ns)  
Figure 26. Output Waveform, 1.8 V CMOS (100 MHz)  
Figure 29. Closed-Loop Transfer Function for 100 Hz and 2 kHz Loop  
Bandwidth Settings; Normal Phase Margin Loop Filter Setting  
3.2  
2.8  
2.4  
2.0  
1.6  
1.2  
0.8  
0.4  
0
2pF LOAD  
10pF LOAD  
–5  
5
15  
25  
35  
45  
55  
65  
75  
85  
95  
TIME (ns)  
Figure 27. Output Waveform, 3.3 V CMOS (20 MHz, Weak Mode)  
Rev. A | Page 24 of 104  
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
INPUT/OUTPUT TERMINATION RECOMMENDATIONS  
10pF  
0.1µF  
XOA  
DOWNSTREAM  
DEVICE  
10MHz TO 50MHz FUNDAMENTAL  
AT CUT CRYSTAL WITH  
WITH HIGH  
AD9557/  
AD9557/  
AD9558  
100  
IMPEDANCE  
AD9558  
INPUT AND  
HSTL OR  
10pF LOAD CAPACITANCE  
INTERNAL  
0.1µF  
LVDS  
DC BIAS  
XOB  
10pF  
Figure 33. System Clock Input (XOA, XOB) in Crystal Mode  
(The recommended CLOAD = 10 pF is shown. The values of the 10 pF shunt  
capacitors shown here should equal the CLOAD of the crystal.)  
Figure 30. AC-Coupled LVDS or HSTL Output Driver  
(100 Ω resistor can go on either side of decoupling capacitors and should be  
as close as possible to the destination receiver.)  
0.1µF  
150  
300Ω  
Z
= 50  
3.3V  
CMOS  
TCXO  
0
XOA  
LVDS OR 1.8V HSTL  
HIGH IMPEDANCE  
DIFFERENTIAL  
RECEIVER  
AD9557/  
AD9558  
HSTL OR  
LVDS  
SINGLE-ENDED  
(NOT COUPLED)  
AD9557/  
AD9558  
100Ω  
0.1µF  
Z
= 50Ω  
0
XOB  
Figure 34. System Clock Input (XOA, XOB) When Using a TCXO/OCXO with  
3.3 V CMOS Output  
Figure 31. DC-Coupled LVDS or HSTL Output Driver  
V
= 3.3V  
S
82  
82Ω  
Z
= 50Ω  
0.1µF  
0.1µF  
0
3.3V  
LVPECL  
AD9557/  
SINGLE-ENDED  
(NOT COUPLED)  
AD9558  
1.8V  
HSTL  
Z
= 50Ω  
0
127Ω  
127Ω  
Figure 32. Interfacing the HSTL Driver to a 3.3 V LVPECL Input  
(This method incorporates impedance matching and dc biasing for bipolar  
LVPECL receivers. If the receiver is self-biased, the termination scheme shown  
in Figure 30 is recommended.)  
Rev. A | Page 25 of 104  
 
 
 
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
GETTING STARTED  
CHIP POWER MONITOR AND STARTUP  
DEVICE REGISTER PROGRAMMING WHEN USING  
A REGISTER SETUP FILE  
The AD9558 monitors the voltage on the power supplies at  
power-up. When DVDD3 is greater than 2.35 V 0.1 V and  
DVDD and AVDD are greater than 1.4 V 0.05 V, the device  
generates a 20 ms reset pulse. The power-up reset pulse is internal  
The evaluation software contains a programming wizard and  
a convenient graphical user interface that assists the user in  
determining the optimal configuration for the DPLL, APLL,  
and SYSCLK based on the desired input and output frequencies.  
It generates a register setup file with a .STP extension that is  
easily readable using a text editor.  
RESET  
and independent of the  
pin. This internal power-up reset  
sequence eliminates the need for the user to provide external power  
supply sequencing. Within 45 ns after the leading edge of the  
internal reset pulse, the M7 to M0 multifunction pins behave  
as high impedance digital inputs and continue to do so until  
programmed otherwise. The delay on the M7 to M0 pin function  
change is 45 ns for pin reset or soft reset.  
After using the evaluation software to create the setup file, use  
the following sequence to program the AD9557 once:  
1. Register 0x0A01 = 0x20 (set user free run mode).  
2. Register 0x0A02 = 0x02 (hold outputs in static SYNC).  
(Skip this step if using SYNC on DPLL phase lock or SYNC  
on DPLL frequency lock. See Register 0x0500[1:0].)  
3. Register 0x0405 = 0x20 (clear APLL VCO calibration).  
4. Write the register values in the STP file from Address 0x0000  
to Address 0x032E.  
During a device reset (either via the power-up reset pulse or the  
RESET  
pin), the multifunction pins (M7 to M0) behave as high  
impedance inputs, but upon removal of the reset condition,  
level-sensitive latches capture the logic pattern present on the  
multifunction pins.  
5. Register 0x0005 = 0x01 (update all registers).  
6. Write the rest of the registers in the STP file, starting at  
Address 0x0400.  
7. Register 0x0405 = 0x21 (calibrate APLLon next I/O update).  
8. Register 0x0403 = 0x07 (configure APLL).  
9. Register 0x0400 = 0x81 (configure APLL).  
10. Register 0x0005 = 0x01 (update all registers).  
11. Register 0x0A01[5] = 0b (clear user free run mode).  
12. Register 0x0005 = 0x01 (update all registers).  
MULTIFUNCTION PINS AT RESET/POWER-UP  
The AD9558 requires the user to supply the desired logic state  
to the PINCONTROL pin, as well as to the M7 to M0 pins. If  
PINCONTROL is high, the part is in hard pin programming  
mode. See the Pin Program Function Description section for  
details on hard pin programming.  
At startup, there are three choices for the M7 to M0 pins: pull-  
up, pull-down, and floating. If the PINCONTROL pin is low,  
the M7 to M0 pins determine the following configurations:  
REGISTER PROGRAMMING OVERVIEW  
Following a reset, the M1 and M0 pins determine whether  
the serial port interface behaves according to the SPI or I2C  
protocol. Specifically, M0 = M1 = low selects the SPI  
interface, and any other value selects the I2C port. The 3-  
level logic of M1 and M0 allows the user to select eight  
possible I2C addresses (see Table 24).  
This section provides an overview of the register blocks in the  
AD9558, describing what they do and why they are important.  
Registers Differing from Defaults for Optimal Performance  
Ensure that the following registers are programmed to the listed  
values for optimal performance:  
The M3 and M2 pins select which of the eight possible  
EEPROM profiles are loaded, or if the EEPROM loading is  
bypassed. Leaving M3 and M2 floating at startup bypasses  
the EEPROM loading, and the factory defaults are used  
instead (see Table 22).  
Register 0x0405[7:4] = 0x2  
Register 0x0403 = 0x07  
Register 0x0400 = 0x81  
If the silicon revision (Register 0x000A) equals 0x21 or higher,  
the values listed here are already the default values.  
Rev. A | Page 26 of 104  
 
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
Program the System Clock and Free Run Tuning Word  
Program the Clock Distribution Outputs  
The system clock multiplier (SYSCLK) parameters are at  
Register 0x0100 to Register 0x0108, and the free run tuning  
word is at Register 0x0300 to Register 0x0303. Use the following  
steps for optimal performance:  
The APLL output goes to the clock distribution block. The  
clock distribution parameters reside in Register 0x0500 to  
Register 0x0509. They include the following:  
Output power-down control  
Output enable (disabled by default)  
Output synchronization  
Output mode control  
Output divider functionality  
1. Set the system clock PLL input type and divider values.  
2. Set the system clock period.  
It is essential to program the system clock period because  
many of the AD9558 subsystems rely on this value.  
3. Set the system clock stability timer.  
See the Clock Distribution section for more information.  
It is highly recommended that the system clock stability  
timer be programmed. This is especially important when  
using the system clock multiplier and also applies when  
using an external system clock source, especially if the  
external source is not expected to be completely stable  
when power is applied to the AD9558. The system clock  
stability timer specifies the amount of time that the system  
clock PLL must be locked before the part declares that the  
system clock is stable. The default value is 50 ms.  
4. Program the free run tuning word.  
The free run frequency of the digital PLL (DPLL) determines  
the frequency appearing at the APLL input when free run  
mode is selected. The free run tuning word is at Register  
0x0300 to Register 0x0303. The correct free run frequency  
is required for the APLL to calibrate and lock correctly.  
5. Set user free run mode (Register 0x0A01[5] = 1b).  
Generate the Output Clock  
If Register 0x0500[1:0] is programmed for automatic clock  
distribution synchronization via the DPLL phase or frequency  
lock, the synthesized output signal appears at the clock distribution  
outputs. Otherwise, set and then clear the soft sync clock  
distribution bit (Register 0x0A02, Bit 1), or use a multifunction  
pin input (if programmed for use) to generate a clock  
distribution sync pulse, which causes the synthesized output  
signal to appear at the clock distribution outputs.  
Program the Multifunction Pins (Optional)  
This step is required only if the user intends to use any of the  
multifunction pins for status or control. The multifunction pin  
parameters are at Register 0x0200 to Register 0x0208.  
Program the IRQ Functionality (Optional)  
Initialize and Calibrate the Output PLL (APLL)  
This step is required only if the user intends to use the IRQ feature.  
The IRQ monitor registers are at Register 0x0D02 to Register  
0x0D09. If the desired bits in the IRQ mask registers at Register  
0x020A to Register 0x020F are set high, the appropriate IRQ  
monitor bit at Register 0x0D02 to Register 0x0D07 is set high  
when the indicated event occurs.  
The registers controlling the APLL are at Register 0x0400  
to Register 0x0408. This low noise, integer-N PLL multiplies  
the DPLL output (which is usually 175 MHz to 200 MHz) to a  
frequency in the 3.35 GHz to 4.05 GHz range. After the system  
clock is configured and the free run tuning word is set in  
Register 0x0300 to Register 0x0303, the user can set the manual  
APLL VCO calibration bit (Register 0x0405[0]) and issue an I/O  
update (Register 0x0005[0]). This process performs the APLL  
VCO calibration. VCO calibration ensures that, at the time of  
calibration, the dc control voltage of the APLL VCO is centered in  
the middle of its operating range. It is important to remember the  
following points when calibrating the APLL VCO:  
Individual IRQ events are cleared by using the IRQ clearing  
registers at Register 0x0A04 to Register 0x0A09, or by setting  
the clear all IRQs bit (Register 0x0A03[1]) to 1b.  
The default values of the IRQ mask registers are such that  
interrupts are not generated. The IRQ pin mode default is open-  
drain NMOS.  
Program the Watchdog Timer (Optional)  
The system clock must be stable.  
This step is required only if the user intends to use the watchdog  
timer. The watchdog timer control is in Register 0x0210 and  
Register 0x0211 and is disabled by default.  
The APLL VCO must have the correct frequency from the  
30-bit DCO (digitally controlled oscillator) during  
calibration.  
The watchdog timer is useful for generating an IRQ after a fixed  
amount of time. The timer is reset by setting the clear watchdog  
timer bit (Register 0x0A03[0]) to 1b.  
The APLL VCO must be recalibrated any time the APLL  
frequency changes.  
APLL VCO calibration occurs on the low-to-high transition  
of the manual APLL VCO calibration bit, and this bit is not  
autoclearing. Therefore, this bit must be cleared (and an I/O  
update issued) before another APLL calibration is started.  
The best way to monitor successful APLL calibration is to  
monitor Bit 2 in Register 0x0D01 (APLL lock).  
Rev. A | Page 27 of 104  
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
Program the Digital Phase-Locked Loop (DPLL)  
Program the Reference Profiles  
The DPLL parameters reside in Register 0x0300 to  
Register 0x032E. They include the following:  
The reference profile parameters reside in Register 0x0700 to  
Register 0x07E6. The AD9558 evaluation software contains a  
wizard that calculates these values based on the users input  
frequency. See the Reference Profiles section for details on  
programming these functions. They include the following:  
Free run frequency  
DPLL pull-in range limits  
DPLL closed-loop phase offset  
Phase slew control (for hitless reference switching)  
Tuning word history control (for holdover operation)  
Reference period  
Reference period tolerance  
Reference validation timer  
Selection of high phase margin loop filter coefficients  
DPLL loop bandwidth  
Reference prescaler (R divider)  
Feedback dividers (N1, N2, N3, FRAC1, and MOD1)  
Phase and frequency lock detector controls  
Program the Reference Inputs  
The reference input parameters reside in Register 0x0600 to  
Register 0x0602. See the Reference Clock Input section for  
details on programming these functions. They include the  
following:  
Reference power-down  
Reference logic family  
Reference priority  
Generate the Reference Acquisition  
After the registers are programmed, the user can clear the user  
freerun bit (Register 0x0A01[5]) and issue an I/O update, using  
Register 0x0005[0] to invoke all of the register settings that are  
programmed up to this point.  
After the registers are programmed, the DPLL locks to the first  
available valid reference that has the highest priority.  
Rev. A | Page 28 of 104  
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
THEORY OF OPERATION  
XO OR XTAL  
XO FREQUENCIES  
10MHz TO 180MHz  
XTAL: 10MHz TO 50MHz  
÷M0 TO ÷M3b ARE  
10-BIT INTEGER  
DIVIDERS  
SYNC  
RESET  
PINCONTROL  
M0 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 IRQ  
1
OUT0  
÷M0  
2
1
SPI/I C  
ROM  
AND  
FSM  
MULTIFUNCTION I/O PINS  
(CONTROL AND STATUS  
READBACK)  
OUT0  
REGISTER  
SPACE  
2
SPI/I C  
SERIAL PORT  
EEPROM  
÷2  
×2  
RF  
FRAME SYNC  
MODE ONLY  
DIVIDER 1  
÷3 TO ÷11  
1
OUT1  
1
OUT1  
÷M1  
SYSTEM  
REFA  
REFA  
1
OUT2  
PFD/CP ÷N3  
LF  
CLOCK  
÷2  
÷2  
÷2  
÷2  
MAX 1.25GHz  
MULTIPLIER  
1
OUT2  
1
OUT3  
REFB  
REFB  
RF  
DIVIDER 2  
÷3 TO ÷11  
÷M2  
1
OUT3  
1
OUT4  
R DIVIDER  
(20-BIT)  
FREE RUN  
TW  
÷M3  
÷M3b  
×2  
REFC  
REFC  
1
OUT4  
×2  
FRAME SYNC PULSE  
17-BIT  
INTEGER  
TUNING  
WORD  
CLAMP  
AND  
DPFD  
DIGITAL  
LOOP  
FILTER  
30-BIT  
NCO  
FRAC1/  
MOD1  
REFD  
REFD  
÷N1  
1
1
OUT5  
OUT5  
HISTORY  
24b/24b  
RESOLUTION  
÷N2  
DIGITAL PLL (DPLL)  
OUTPUT PLL (APLL)  
REF MONITORING  
AUTOMATIC  
SWITCHING  
3.35GHz  
TO  
4.05GHz  
PFD/CP  
LF  
2kHz TO 8kHz FRAME SYNC SIGNAL  
AD9558  
LF_VCO2  
APLL  
STATUS  
1
OUT0, OUT1, OUT2, OUT3, OUT4: 360kHz TO 1.25GHz; OUT5: 352Hz TO 1.25GHz  
Figure 35. Detailed Block Diagram  
section, which has two divide-by-3 to divide-by-11 RF dividers  
that are cascaded with 10-bit integer (divide-by-1 to divide-by-  
1024) channel dividers.  
OVERVIEW  
The AD9558 provides clocking outputs that are directly related  
in phase and frequency to the selected (active) reference, but  
with jitter characteristics that are governed by the system clock,  
the DCO, and the output PLL (APLL). The AD9558 supports  
up to four reference inputs and input frequencies ranging from  
2 kHz to 1250 MHz. The core of this product is a digital phase-  
locked loop (DPLL). The DPLL has a programmable digital loop  
filter that greatly reduces jitter that is transferred from the active  
reference to the output. The AD9558 supports both manual and  
automatic holdover. While in holdover, the AD9558 continues to  
provide an output as long as the system clock is present. The  
holdover output frequency is a time average of the output  
frequency history just prior to the transition to the holdover  
condition. The device offers manual and automatic reference  
switchover capability if the active reference is degraded or fails  
completely. The AD9558 also has adaptive clocking capability  
that allows the DPLL divider ratios to be changed while the DPLL  
is locked.  
The XOA and XOB pins provide the input for the system clock.  
These pins accept a reference clock in the 10 MHz to 600 MHz  
range, or a 10 MHz to 50 MHz crystal connected directly across  
the XOA and XOB pins. The system clock provides the clocks to  
the frequency monitors, the DPLL, and internal switching logic.  
The AD9558 has six output drivers, arranged into four channels.  
Each channel has a dedicated 10-bit programmable post divider.  
Channel 0 and Channel 3 have one driver each, and Channel 1  
and Channel 2 have two drivers each. Each driver is programmable  
either as a single differential or dual single-ended CMOS output.  
The clock distribution section operates at up to 1250 MHz.  
In differential mode, the output drivers run on a 1.8 V power  
supply to offer very high performance with minimal power  
consumption. There are two differential modes: LVDS and 1.8 V  
HSTL. In 1.8 V HSTL mode, the voltage swing is compatible  
with LVPECL. If LVPECL signal levels are required, the designer  
can ac-couple the AD9558 output and use Thevenin-equivalent  
termination at the destination to drive the LVPECL inputs.  
The AD9558 has a system clock multiplier, a digital PLL (DPLL),  
and an analog PLL (APLL). The input signal goes first to the DPLL,  
which performs the jitter cleaning and most of the frequency  
translation. The DPLL features a 30-bit digitally controlled  
oscillator (DCO) output that generates a signal in the 175 MHz  
to 200 MHz range. The DPLL output goes to an analog integer-N  
PLL (APLL), which multiplies the signal up to the 3.35 GHz to  
4.05 GHz range. That signal is then sent to the clock distribution  
In single-ended mode, each differential output driver can  
operate as two single-ended CMOS outputs. OUT0 and OUT5  
support either 1.8 V or 3.3 V CMOS operation. OUT1 through  
OUT4 support only 1.8 V operation.  
Rev. A | Page 29 of 104  
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
Reference Validation Timer  
REFERENCE CLOCK INPUTS  
Each reference input has a dedicated validation timer. The  
validation timer establishes the amount of time that a previously  
faulted reference must remain unfaulted before the AD9558  
declares it valid. The timeout period of the validation timer is  
programmable via a 16-bit register. The 16-bit number stored  
in the validation register represents units of milliseconds (ms),  
which yields a maximum timeout period of 65,535 ms.  
Four pairs of pins provide access to the reference clock receivers.  
To accommodate input signals with slow rising and falling edges,  
both the differential and single-ended input receivers employ  
hysteresis. Hysteresis also ensures that a disconnected or  
floating input does not cause the receiver to oscillate.  
When configured for differential operation, the input receivers  
accommodate either ac- or dc-coupled input signals. The input  
receivers are capable of accepting dc-coupled LVDS and 2.5 V  
and 3.3 V LVPECL signals. The receiver is internally dc biased  
to handle ac-coupled operation, but there is no internal 50 Ω or  
100 Ω termination.  
It is possible to disable the validation timer by programming the  
validation timer to 0b. With the validation timer disabled, the  
user must validate a reference manually via the manual reference  
validation override controls register (Address 0x0A0B).  
Reference Validation Override Control  
When configured for single-ended operation, the input  
receivers exhibit a pull-down load of 45 kΩ (typical). Three  
user-programmable threshold voltage ranges are available for  
each single-ended receiver.  
The user also has the ability to override the reference validation  
logic and can either force an invalid reference to be treated as  
valid, or force a valid reference to be treated as an invalid  
reference. These controls are in Register 0x0A0B to Register  
0x0A0D.  
REFERENCE MONITORS  
The accuracy of the input reference monitors depends on a  
known and accurate system clock period. Therefore, the  
functioning of the reference monitors is not operable until the  
system clock is stable.  
REFERENCE PROFILES  
The AD9558 has an independent profile for each reference input.  
A profile consists of a set of device parameters such as the R divider  
and N divider, among others The profiles allow the user to  
prescribe the specific device functionality that should take effect  
when one of the input references becomes the active reference.  
Reference Period Monitor  
Each reference input has a dedicated monitor that repeatedly  
measures the reference period. The AD9558 uses the reference  
period measurements to determine the validity of the reference  
based on a set of user-provided parameters in the profile  
register area of the register map.  
The AD9558 evaluation software includes a frequency planning  
wizard that can configure the profile parameters, given the  
input and output frequencies.  
The user should not change a profile that is currently in use  
because unpredictable behavior may result. The user can either  
select free run or holdover mode or invalidate the reference  
input prior to changing it.  
The monitor works by comparing the measured period of a  
particular reference input with the parameters stored in the  
profile register assigned to that same reference input. The  
parameters include the reference period, an inner tolerance,  
and an outer tolerance. A 40-bit number defines the reference  
period in units of femtoseconds (fs). The 40-bit range allows for  
a reference period entry of up to 1.1 ms. A 20-bit number defines  
the inner and outer tolerances. The value stored in the register  
is the reciprocal of the tolerance specification. For example, a  
tolerance specification of 50 ppm yields a register value of  
1/(50 ppm) = 1/0.000050 = 20,000 (0x04E20).  
REFERENCE SWITCHOVER  
An attractive feature of the AD9558 is its versatile reference  
switchover capability. The flexibility of the reference switchover  
functionality resides in a sophisticated prioritization algorithm  
that is coupled with register-based controls. This scheme  
provides the user with maximum control over the state machine  
that handles reference switchover.  
The use of two tolerance values provides hysteresis for the  
monitor decision logic. The inner tolerance applies to a  
previously faulted reference and specifies the largest period  
tolerance that a previously faulted reference can exhibit before it  
qualifies as nonfaulted. The outer tolerance applies to an already  
nonfaulted reference. It specifies the largest period tolerance  
that a nonfaulted reference can exhibit before being faulted.  
The main reference switchover control resides in the loop  
mode register (Address 0x0A01). The REF switchover mode  
bits (Register 0x0A01, Bits[4:2]) allow the user to select one of  
the five operating modes of the reference switchover state machine,  
as follows:  
Automatic revertive mode  
Automatic non-revertive mode  
Manual with automatic fallback mode  
Manual with holdover mode  
To produce decision hysteresis, the inner tolerance must be less  
than the outer tolerance. That is, a faulted reference must meet  
tighter requirements to become nonfaulted than a nonfaulted  
reference must meet to become faulted.  
Full manual mode (without auto-holdover)  
Rev. A | Page 30 of 104  
 
 
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
In the automatic modes, a fully automatic priority-based algorithm  
selects which reference is the active reference. When programmed  
for an automatic mode, the device chooses the highest priority  
valid reference. When both references have the same priority,  
REFA gets preference over REFB. However, the reference position  
is used only as a tie-breaker and does not initiate a reference switch.  
A diagram of the DPLL core of the AD9558 appears in Figure 36.  
The phase/frequency detector, feedback path, lock detectors,  
phase offset, and phase slew rate limiting that comprise this  
second generation DPLL are all digital implementations.  
The start of the DPLL signal chain is the reference signal, fR,  
which is the frequency of the reference input. A reference  
prescaler reduces the frequency of this signal by an integer factor,  
R + 1, where R is the 20-bit value stored in the appropriate  
profile register and 0 ≤ R ≤ 1,048,575. Therefore, the frequency  
at the output of the R-divider (or the input to the time-to-digital  
converter (TDC)) is  
The following list gives an overview of the five operating modes:  
Automatic revertive mode. The device selects the highest  
priority valid reference and switches to a higher priority  
reference if it becomes available, even if the reference in use  
is still valid. In this mode, the user reference is ignored.  
Automatic non-revertive mode. The device stays with the  
currently selected reference as long as it is valid, even if  
a higher priority reference becomes available. The user  
reference is ignored in this mode.  
Manual with automatic fallback mode. The device uses the  
user reference for as long as it is valid. If it becomes invalid,  
the reference input with the highest priority is chosen in  
accordance with the priority-based algorithm.  
fR  
fTDC  
=
R +1  
A TDC samples the output of the R-divider. The TDC/PFD  
produces a time series of digital words and delivers them to the  
digital loop filter. The digital loop filter offers the following  
advantages:  
Determination of the filter response by numeric  
coefficients rather than by discrete component values  
The absence of analog components (R/L/C), which  
eliminates tolerance variations due to aging  
The absence of thermal noise associated with analog  
components  
The absence of control node leakage current associated  
with analog components (a source of reference feed-  
through spurs in the output spectrum of a traditional  
analog PLL)  
Manual with holdover mode. The user reference is the  
active reference until it becomes invalid. At that point,  
the device automatically goes into holdover.  
Manual mode without holdover. The user reference is the  
active reference, regardless of whether or not it is valid.  
The user also has the option to force the device directly into  
holdover or free run operation via the user holdover and user  
freerun bits. In free run mode, the free run frequency tuning  
word register defines the free run output frequency. In holdover  
mode, the output frequency depends on the holdover control  
settings (see the Holdover section).  
The digital loop filter produces a time series of digital words at  
its output and delivers them to the frequency tuning input of a  
sigma-delta (Σ-Δ) modulator (SDM). The digital words from  
the loop filter steer the DCO frequency toward frequency and  
phase lock with the input signal (fTDC).  
Phase Build-Out Reference Switching  
The AD9558 supports phase build-out reference switching,  
which is the term given to a reference switchover that  
completely masks any phase difference between the previous  
reference and the new reference. That is, there is virtually no  
phase change detectable at the output when a phase build-out  
switchover occurs.  
The DPLL includes a feedback divider that causes the digital  
loop to operate at an integer-plus-fractional multiple. The  
output of the DPLL is  
FRAC1  
MOD1  
fOUT _ DPLL = fTDC × (N1 + 1) +  
DIGITAL PLL (DPLL) CORE  
where N1 is the 17-bit value stored in the appropriate profile  
registers (Register 0x0715 to Register 0x0717 for REFA). FRAC1  
and MOD1 are the 24-bit numerators and denominators of the  
fractional feedback divider block. The fractional portion of the  
feedback divider can be bypassed by setting FRAC1 to 0, but  
MOD1 should never be 0.  
DPLL Overview  
SYSTEM  
CLOCK  
FREE RUN  
×2  
TW  
FROM  
REF  
INPUT  
MUX  
R DIVIDER  
(20-BIT)  
TUNING  
WORD  
CLAMP  
AND  
DIGITAL  
LOOP  
FILTER  
+
FRAC1/  
MOD1  
The DPLL output frequency is usually 175 MHz to 200 MHz for  
optimal performance.  
÷N1  
HISTORY  
17-BIT  
INTEGER  
24-BIT/24-BIT  
RESOLUTION  
TO APLL  
FROM APLL  
Figure 36. Digital PLL Core  
Rev. A | Page 31 of 104  
 
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
TDC/PFD  
DPLL Digitally Controlled Oscillator Free Run Frequency  
The phase-frequency detector (PFD) is an all-digital block. It  
compares the digital output from the TDC (which relates to the  
active reference edge) with the digital word from the feedback  
block. It uses a digital code pump and digital integrator (rather  
than a conventional charge pump and capacitor) to generate the  
error signal that steers the DCO frequency toward phase lock.  
The AD9558 uses a Σ-Δ modulator (SDM) as a digitally controlled  
oscillator (DCO). The DCO free run frequency can be calculated  
from the following equation:  
2
fdco _ freerun = fSYS  
×
FTW0  
8 +  
230  
Programmable Digital Loop Filter  
where FTW0 is the value in Register 0x0300 to Register 0x0303,  
and fSYS is the system clock frequency. See the System Clock  
section for information on calculating the system clock frequency.  
The AD9558 loop filter is a third order digital IIR filter that is  
analogous to the third order analog loop shown in Figure 37.  
R
3
Adaptive Clocking  
R
C
C
3
2
1
The AD9558 can support adaptive clocking applications such as  
asynchronous mapping and demapping. In these applications,  
the output frequency can be dynamically adjusted by up to  
100 ppm from the nominal output frequency without manually  
breaking the DPLL loop and reprogramming the part. This  
function is supported for REFA only, not REFB.  
C
2
Figure 37. Third Order Analog Loop Filter  
The AD9558 loop filter block features a simplified architecture  
in which the user enters the desired loop characteristics directly  
into the profile registers. This architecture makes the calculation  
of individual coefficients unnecessary in most cases, while still  
offering complete flexibility.  
The following registers are used in this function:  
Register 0x0717 (DPLL N1 divider)  
Register 0x0718 to Register 0x071A (DPLL FRAC1 divider)  
Register 0x071B to Register 0x071D (DPLL MOD1  
divider)  
The AD9558 has two preset digital loop filters: high (88.5°) phase  
margin and normal (70°) phase margin. The loop filter coefficients  
are stored in Register 0x0317 to Register 0x0322 for high phase  
margin and Register 0x0323 to Register 0x032E for normal phase  
margin. The high phase margin loop filter is intended for  
applications in which the closed-loop transfer function must  
not have greater than 0.1 dB of peaking.  
Writing to these registers requires an I/O update by writing  
0x01 to Register 0x0005 before the new values take effect.  
To make small adjustments to the output frequency, the user  
can vary the FRAC1 and issue an I/O update. The advantage to  
using only FRAC1 to adjust the output frequency is that the  
DPLL does not briefly enter holdover. Therefore, the FRAC1 bit  
can be updated as fast as the phase detector frequency of  
the DPLL.  
Bit 0 of the following registers selects which filter is used for  
each profile: Register 0x070E for Profile A, Register 0x074E for  
Profile B, Register 0x078E for Profile C, and Register 0x07CE  
for Profile D.  
The loop bandwidth for each profile is set in the following  
registers: Register 0x070F to Register 0x0711 for Profile A,  
Register 0x074F to Register 0x0751 for Profile B, Register 0x078F  
to Register 0x0791 for Profile C, and Register 0x07CF to  
Register 0x07D1 for Profile D.  
Writing to the N1 and MOD1 dividers allows for larger changes  
to the output frequency. When the AD9558 detects that the N1  
or MOD1 values have changed, it automatically enters and exits  
holdover for a brief instant without any disturbance in the  
output frequency. This limits how quickly the output frequency  
can be adapted.  
The two preset conditions should cover all of the intended  
applications for the AD9558. For special cases where these  
conditions must be modified, the tools for calculating these  
coefficients are available by contacting Analog Devices directly.  
It is important to realize that the amount of frequency adjustment  
is limited to 100 ppm before the output PLL (APLL) needs a  
recalibration. Variations that are larger than 100 ppm are  
possible, but the ability of the AD9558 to maintain lock over  
temperature extremes may be compromised.  
It is also important to remember that the rate of change in  
output frequency depends on the DPLL loop bandwidth.  
Rev. A | Page 32 of 104  
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
it removes one drain bucket from the tub. Note that it is not the  
polarity of the phase error sample, but its magnitude relative to  
the phase threshold value, that determines whether to fill or drain.  
If more filling is taking place than draining, the water level in  
the tub eventually rises above the high water mark (+1024), which  
causes the phase lock detector to indicate lock. If more draining  
is taking place than filling, then the water level in the tub eventually  
falls below the low water mark (−1024), which causes the phase  
lock detector to indicate unlock. The ability to specify the threshold  
level, fill rate, and drain rate enables the user to tailor the operation  
of the phase lock detector to the statistics of the timing jitter  
associated with the input reference signal.  
DPLL Phase Lock Detector  
The DPLL contains an all-digital phase lock detector. The user  
controls the threshold sensitivity and hysteresis of the phase  
detector via the profile registers.  
The phase lock detector behaves in a manner analogous to  
water in a tub (see Figure 38). The total capacity of the tub is  
4096 units with −2048 denoting empty, 0 denoting the 50%  
point, and +2048 denoting full. The tub also has a safeguard to  
prevent overflow. Furthermore, the tub has a low water mark at  
−1024 and a high water mark at +1024. To change the water  
level, the user adds water with a fill bucket or removes water  
with a drain bucket. The user specifies the size of the fill and  
drain buckets via the 8-bit fill rate and drain rate values in the  
profile registers.  
Note that when the AD9558 enters the free run or holdover  
mode, the DPLL phase lock detector indicates an unlocked  
state. However, when the AD9558 performs a reference switch,  
the lock detector state prior to the switch is preserved during  
the transition period.  
PREVIOUS  
STATE  
LOCKED  
UNLOCKED  
2048  
1024  
LOCK LEVEL  
DPLL Frequency Lock Detector  
FILL  
DRAIN  
RATE  
RATE  
0
The operation of the frequency lock detector is identical to that  
of the phase lock detector. The only difference is that the fill or  
drain decision is based on the period deviation between the  
reference and feedback signals of the DPLL instead of the phase  
error at the output of the PFD.  
UNLOCK LEVEL  
–1024  
–2048  
Figure 38. Lock Detector Diagram  
The water level in the tub is what the lock detector uses to  
determine the lock and unlock conditions. When the water level  
is below the low water mark (−1024), the detector indicates an  
unlock condition. Conversely, when the water level is above the  
high water mark (+1024), the detector indicates a lock condition.  
When the water level is between the marks, the detector simply  
holds its last condition. This concept appears graphically in  
Figure 38, with an overlay of an example of the instantaneous  
water level (vertical) vs. time (horizontal) and the resulting  
lock/unlock states.  
The frequency lock detector uses a 24-bit frequency threshold  
register specified in units of picoseconds (ps). Thus, the frequency  
threshold value extends from 0 μs to 16.777215 μs. It represents  
the magnitude of the difference in period between the reference  
and feedback signals at the input to the DPLL. For example, if  
the reference signal is 1.25 MHz and the feedback signal is  
1.38 MHz, the period difference is approximately 75.36 ns  
(|1/1,250,000 − 1/1,380,000| ≈ 75.36 ns).  
Frequency Clamp  
The AD9558 DPLL features a digital tuning word clamp that  
ensures that the DPLL output frequency stays within a defined  
range. This feature is very useful to eliminate undesirable  
behavior in cases where the reference input clocks may be  
unpredictable. The tuning word clamp is also useful to  
guarantee that the APLL never loses lock by ensuring that the  
APLL VCO frequency stays within its tuning range.  
During any given PFD cycle, the detector either adds water with  
the fill bucket or removes water with the drain bucket (one or  
the other but not both). The decision of whether to add or  
remove water depends on the threshold level specified by the  
user. The phase lock threshold value is a 16-bit number stored  
in the profile registers and is expressed in picoseconds (ps).  
Thus, the phase lock threshold extends from 0 ns to 65.535 ns  
and represents the magnitude of the phase error at the output of  
the PFD.  
Frequency Tuning Word History  
The AD9558 has the ability to track the history of the tuning  
word samples generated by the DPLL digital loop filter output.  
It does so by periodically computing the average tuning word  
value over a user-specified interval. This average tuning word is  
used during holdover mode to maintain the average frequency  
when no input references are present.  
The phase lock detector compares each phase error sample at  
the output of the PFD to the programmed phase threshold value.  
If the absolute value of the phase error sample is less than or  
equal to the programmed phase threshold value, the detector  
control logic dumps one fill bucket into the tub. Otherwise,  
Rev. A | Page 33 of 104  
 
 
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
frequency remains constant. The accuracy of the AD9558 in  
holdover mode is dependent on the device programming and  
availability of tuning word history.  
LOOP CONTROL STATE MACHINE  
Switchover  
Switchover occurs when the loop controller switches directly  
from one input reference to another. The AD9558 handles a  
reference switchover by briefly entering holdover mode, loading  
the new DPLL parameters, and then immediately recovering.  
During the switchover event, however, the AD9558 preserves  
the status of the lock detectors to avoid phantom unlock  
indications.  
Recovery from Holdover  
When in holdover mode and a valid reference becomes  
available, the device exits holdover operation. The loop state  
machine restores the DPLL to closed-loop operation, locks to  
the selected reference, and sequences the recovery of all the  
loop parameters based on the profile settings for the active  
reference.  
Holdover  
Note that, if the user holdover bit is set, the device does not  
automatically exit holdover when a valid reference is available.  
However, automatic recovery can occur after clearing the user  
holdover bit (Bit 6 in Register 0x0A01).  
The holdover state of the DPLL is typically used when none of  
the input references are present, although the user can also  
manually engage holdover mode. In holdover mode, the output  
Rev. A | Page 34 of 104  
 
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
SYSTEM CLOCK (SYSCLK)  
SYSTEM CLOCK INPUTS  
The XTAL path enables the connection of a crystal resonator  
(typically 10 MHz to 50 MHz) across the XOA and XOB input  
pins. An internal amplifier provides the negative resistance  
required to induce oscillation. The internal amplifier expects an  
AT cut, fundamental mode crystal with a maximum motional  
resistance of 100 ꢁ. The following crystals, listed in alphabetical  
order, may meet these criteria. Analog Devices, Inc., does not  
guarantee their operation with the AD9558 nor does Analog  
Devices endorse one crystal supplier over another. The AD9558  
reference design uses a 49.152 MHz crystal, which is high  
performance, low spurious content, and readily available.  
Functional Description  
The SYSCLK circuit provides a low jitter, stable, high frequency  
clock for use by the rest of the chip. The XOA and XOB pins  
connect to the internal SYSCLK multiplier. The SYSCLK multiplier  
can synthesize the system clock by connecting a crystal resonator  
across the XOA and XOB input pins or by connecting a low  
frequency clock source. The optimal signal for the system clock  
input is either a crystal in the 50 MHz range or an ac-coupled  
square wave with a 1 V p-p amplitude.  
System Clock Period  
AVX/Kyocera CX3225SB  
ECS ECX-32  
Epson/Toyocom TSX-3225  
Fox FX3225BS  
NDK NX3225SA  
Siward SX-3225  
For the AD9558 to accurately measure the frequency of incoming  
reference signals, the user must enter the system clock period  
into the nominal system clock period registers (Register 0x0103  
to Register 0x0105). The SYSCLK period is entered in units of  
nanoseconds (ns).  
System Clock Details  
Suntsu SCM10B48-49.152 MHz  
There are two internal paths for the SYSCLK input signal: low  
frequency non-xtal (LF) and crystal resonator (XTAL).  
SYSTEM CLOCK MULTIPLIER  
The SYSCLK PLL multiplier is an integer-N design with an  
integrated VCO. It provides a means to convert a low frequency  
clock input to the desired system clock frequency, fSYS (750 MHz  
to 805 MHz). The SYSCLK PLL multiplier accepts input signals  
of between 3.5 MHz and 600 MHz, but frequencies that are in  
excess of 150 MHz require the system clock P-divider to ensure  
compliance with the maximum PFD rate (150 MHz). The PLL  
contains a feedback divider (N) that is programmable for divide  
values between 4 and 255.  
Using a TCXO for the system clock is a common use for the LF  
path. Applications requiring DPLL loop bandwidths of less  
than 50 Hz or high stability in holdover require a TCXO. As an  
alternative to the 49.152 MHz crystal for these applications, the  
AD9558 reference design uses a 19.2 MHz TCXO, which offers  
excellent holdover stability and a good combination of low jitter  
and low spurious content.  
The 1.8 V differential receiver connected to the XOA and XOB  
pins is self-biased to a dc level of ~1 V, and ac coupling is strongly  
recommended. When a 3.3 V CMOS oscillator is in use, it is  
important to use a voltage divider to reduce the input high  
voltage to a maximum of 1.8 V. See Figure 34 for details on  
connecting a 3.3 V CMOS TCXO to the system clock input.  
sysclk _ Ndiv  
fSYS = fOSC  
×
sysclk _ Pdiv  
where:  
OSC is the frequency at the XOA and XOB pins.  
f
sysclk_Ndiv is the value stored in Register 0x0100.  
sysclk_Pdiv is the system clock P divider that is determined by  
the setting of Register 0x0101[2:1].  
The non-xtal input path permits the user to provide an LVPECL,  
LVDS, 1.8 V CMOS, or sinusoidal low frequency clock for  
multiplication by the integrated SYSCLK PLL. The LF path handles  
input frequencies from 3.5 MHz up to 100 MHz. However,  
when using a sinusoidal input signal, it is best to use a frequency  
that is in excess of 20 MHz. Otherwise, the resulting low slew  
rate can lead to substandard noise performance. Note that the  
non-xtal path includes an optional 2× frequency multiplier to  
double the rate at the input to the SYSCLK PLL and potentially  
reduce the PLL in-band noise. However, to avoid exceeding the  
maximum PFD rate of 150 MHz, the 2× frequency multiplier is  
only for input frequencies that are below 75 MHz.  
If the system clock doubler is used, the value of sysclk_Ndiv  
should be half of its original value.  
The system clock multiplier features a simple lock detector that  
compares the time difference between the reference and feedback  
edges. The most common cause of the SYSCLK multiplier not  
locking is a non-50% duty cycle at the SYSCLK input while the  
system clock doubler is enabled.  
The non-xtal path also includes an input divider (M) that is  
programmable for divide-by-1, -2, -4, or -8. The purpose of the  
divider is to limit the frequency at the input to the PLL to less  
than 150 MHz (the maximum PFD rate).  
Rev. A | Page 35 of 104  
 
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
System Clock Stability Timer  
stable operating condition is detected, a timer is run for the  
duration that is stored in the system clock stability period  
registers. If at any time during this waiting period, the condition  
is violated, the timer is reset and halted until a stable condition  
is reestablished. After the specified period elapses, the AD9558  
reports the system clock as stable.  
Because the reference monitors depend on the system clock  
being at a known frequency, it is important that the system  
clock be stable before activating the monitors. At initial power-  
up, the system clock status is not known, and, therefore, it is  
reported as being unstable. After the part has been programmed,  
the system clock PLL (if enabled) eventually locks. When a  
Rev. A | Page 36 of 104  
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
OUTPUT PLL (APLL)  
A diagram of the output PLL (APLL) is shown in Figure 39.  
Calibration of the APLL must be performed at startup and  
when the nominal input frequency to the APLL changes by  
more than 100 ppm, although the APLL maintains lock  
over voltage and temperature extremes without recalibration.  
Calibration centers the dc operating voltage at the input to the  
APLL VCO.  
INTEGER DIVIDER  
÷N2  
OUTPUT PLL DIVIDER (APLL)  
TO CLOCK  
DISTRIBUTION  
PFD  
CP  
LF  
FROM DPLL  
VCO2  
3.35GHz TO 4.05GHz  
APLL calibration at startup can be accomplished during initial  
register loading by following the instructions in the Device  
Register Programming When Using a Register Setup File  
section of this datasheet.  
LF_VCO2  
LF CAP  
Figure 39. Output PLL Block Diagram  
The APLL provides the frequency upconversion from the DPLL  
output to the 3.35 GHz to 4.05 GHz range, while also providing  
noise filtering on the DPLL output. The APLL reference input is  
the output of the DPLL. The feedback divider is an integer divider.  
The loop filter is partially integrated with the one external 6.8 nF  
capacitor. The nominal loop bandwidth for this PLL is 250 kHz,  
with 68 degrees of phase margin.  
To recalibrate the APLL VCO after the chip has been running,  
the user should first input the new settings (if any). Ensure that  
the system clock is still locked and stable, and that the DPLL is  
in free run mode with the free run tuning word set to the same  
output frequency that is used when the DPLL is locked.  
Use the following steps to calibrate the APLL VCO:  
1. Ensure that the system clock is locked and stable.  
2. Ensure that the DPLL is in user free run mode  
(Register 0x0A01[5] = 1b), and the free run tuning word is set.  
3. Write Register 0x0405 = 0x20.  
4. Write Register 0x0005 = 0x01.  
5. Write Register 0x0405 = 0x21.  
The frequency wizard that is included in the evaluation software  
configures the APLL, and the user should not need to make  
changes to the APLL settings. However, there may be special cases  
where the user may wish to adjust the APLL loop bandwidth to  
meet a specific phase noise requirement. The easiest way to change  
the APLL loop BW is to adjust the APLL charge pump current  
in Register 0x0400. There is sufficient stability (68ꢂ of phase  
margin) in the APLL default settings to permit a broad range of  
adjustment without causing the APLL to be unstable. The user  
should contact Analog Devices directly if more detail is needed.  
6. Write Register 0x0005 = 0x01.  
Monitor the APLL status using Bit 2 in Register 0x0D01.  
Rev. A | Page 37 of 104  
 
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
CLOCK DISTRIBUTION  
1
1
OUT0  
OUT0  
÷M0  
MAX  
RF  
1.25GHz  
FRAME SYNC  
MODE ONLY  
1
1
1
1
DIVIDER 1  
÷3 TO ÷11  
OUT1  
OUT1  
OUT2  
OUT2  
÷M1  
÷M2  
FROM APLL  
(3.35GHz TO 4.05GHz)  
1
MAX  
1.25GHz  
OUT3  
OUT3  
RF  
DIVIDER 2  
÷3 TO ÷11  
1
1
OUT4  
OUT4  
1
CHIP RESET  
SYNC/SOFT_SYNC  
CHANNEL  
SYNC  
SYNC SIGNAL TO  
÷M3  
M0 TO M3 DIVIDERS  
BLOCK  
FRAME SYNC  
÷M3b  
×2  
FRAME SYNC ENGAGED SIGNAL  
Fsync_ALIGN_METHOD  
FRAME  
SYNC  
BLOCK  
1
OUT5  
OUT5  
1
SELECTED INPUT FRAME PULSE  
FRAME  
SYNC  
MONITOR  
OUT0, OUT1, OUT2, OUT3, OUT4: 360kHz TO 1.25GHz; OUT5: 352Hz TO 1.25GHz.  
Figure 40. Clock Distribution Block Diagram  
All CMOS drivers feature a CMOS drive strength that allows  
the user to choose between a strong, high performance CMOS  
driver, or a lower power setting with less EMI and crosstalk.  
The best setting is application dependent.  
CLOCK DIVIDERS  
The channel divider blocks, M0, M1, M2, M3, and M3b, are  
10-bit integer dividers with a divide range of 1 to 1023. The  
channel divider block contains duty cycle correction that  
guarantees 50% duty cycle for both even and odd divide ratios.  
For applications where LVPECL levels are required, the user  
should choose the HSTL mode, and ac-couple the output signal.  
See the Input/Output Termination Recommendations section  
for recommended termination schemes.  
OUTPUT POWER-DOWN  
The output drivers can be individually powered down.  
OUTPUT ENABLE  
CLOCK DISTRIBUTION SYNCHRONIZATION  
Each of the output channels offers independent control of enable/  
disable functionality via the distribution enable register. The  
distribution outputs use synchronization logic to control  
enable/disable activity to avoid the production of runt pulses  
and ensure that outputs with the same divide ratios become  
active/inactive in unison.  
Divider Synchronization  
The dividers in the clock distribution channels can be  
synchronized with each other.  
At power-up, the clock dividers are held static until a sync signal  
is initiated by the channel SYNC block. The following are  
possible sources of a SYNC signal, and these settings are found  
in Register 0x0500:  
OUTPUT MODE  
The user has independent control of the operating mode of each of  
the four output channels via the output clock distribution registers  
(Address 0x0500 to Address 0x0515). The operating mode  
control includes  
Direct sync via Bit 2 of Register 0x0500  
Direct sync via a sync op code (0xA1) in the EEPROM  
storage sequence during EEPROM loading  
DPLL phase or frequency lock  
Logic family and pin functionality  
Output drive strength  
Output polarity  
Divide ratio  
Phase of each output channel  
A rising edge of the selected reference input  
SYNC  
The  
pin  
A multifunction pin configured for the SYNC signal  
The APLL lock detect signal gates the SYNC signal from the  
channel sync block shown in Figure 40. The channel dividers  
receive a SYNC signal from the channel SYNC block only if the  
APLL is calibrated and locked, unless the APLL locked  
controlled sync bit (Register 0x0405[3]) is set.  
Channel 0 and Channel 3 provide 3.3 V CMOS, in addition  
to 1.8 V CMOS modes. Channel 1 and Channel 2 have 1.8 V  
CMOS, LVDS, and HSTL modes.  
Rev. A | Page 38 of 104  
 
 
 
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
A channel can be programmed to ignore the sync function by  
setting the mask Channel x sync bits in Register 0x0500[7:4].  
When programmed to ignore the sync, the channel ignores  
both the user initiated sync signal and the zero delay initiated  
sync signals, and the channel divider starts toggling, provided  
that the APLL is calibrated and locked, or if the APLL locked  
controlled sync bit (Register 0x0405[3]) is set.  
If the output SYNC function is to be controlled using an M pin,  
use the following steps:  
1. First, enable the M pins by writing Register 0x0200 = 0x01.  
2. Issue an I/O update (Register 0x0005 = 0x01).  
3. Set the appropriate M pin function.  
If this process is not followed, a SYNC pulse is issued  
automatically.  
Rev. A | Page 39 of 104  
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
FRAME SYNCHRONIZATION  
The AD9558 provides frame synchronization fuction/mode.  
With this function, the AD9558 can take a pair consisting of a  
reference clock and a 2 kHz or 8 kHz frame pulse as input signals  
and generate a pair consisting of a synchronized output clock  
and an output frame pulse while the output frame pulse is  
synchronized with the input frame pulse also. The reference  
clock is used to synthesize the output clock and output frame  
pulse through DPLL/output PLL/distribution and the input frame  
pulse is used to control the phase of the output frame pulse.  
CLOCK OUTPUTS IN FRAME SYNCHRONIZATION  
MODE  
The AD9558 has six outputs (OUT0 to OUT5). In frame sync  
mode, the OUT0 and OUT5 form the pair of output clock  
(OUT0) and output frame pulse (OUT5). The frequency of  
OUT0 is required to have the integer relation with the frequency of  
the OUT5 (fOUT0 = M × fOUT5). The rest of the outputs (OUT1 to  
OUT4) do not participate in frame synchronization mode and  
are programmed and synchronized with each other the same as  
Frame synchronization is not supported in the soft or hard pin  
control mode.  
SYNC  
in normal mode (except for  
function). However, OUT1  
to OUT4 should not be synchronized with the OUT0/OUT5.  
REFERENCE CONFIGURATION IN FRAME  
SYNCHRONIZATION MODE  
CONTROL REGISTERS FOR FRAME  
SYNCHRONIZATION MODE  
In frame synchronization mode, four AD9558 reference inputs  
(REFA/REFB/REFC/REFD) are arranged into two pairs of signals:  
REFA and REFC form a pair of input clock/input frame pulse  
with REFA as the input clock, and REFC as the frame pulse.  
REFB and REFD form the second pair of input clock/ input  
frame pulse with REFB as the input clock and REFD is the frame  
pulse. During reference switchover, only two input clocks, REFA  
and REFB, are assigned with a priority index. The two frame  
pulses, REFC and REFD, are not assigned with the priority index  
(the priority register bits in the profiles associated with input  
frame pulse are ignored). Each pair of input clock/ frame pulse  
participates in the reference selection as a group, and the valid  
state and priority of the pair are used in determining the reference  
selection. The priority of the pair is indicated by the priority  
index of the input clock in the pair.  
The frame synchronization function is enabled by setting  
Register 0x0640[0] to 1b. When Register 0x0640[0] = 1b, the  
following occurs:  
The frame synchronization control bits (Register  
0x0641[3:0]) are enabled.  
SYNC  
SYNC  
The  
SYNC  
pin switches from  
function to frame  
SYNC  
function. In frame synchronization mode,  
cannot be used as clock distribution synchronization  
function as it is in normal mode. Instead it is used as the  
frame synchronization arm function.  
When the AD9558 is in frame synchronization mode, the frame  
SYNC  
synchronization function can be armed by either the  
pin  
or the arm soft Fsync bit (Register 0x0641[0]), which is selected  
by the Fsync arm method bit (Register 0x0641[1]. A value of 0b  
Users have the option to either include or exclude the valid state  
of input frame pulse in the reference selection by programming  
the validate Fsync reference bit (Register 0x0641[3]). When  
Register 0x0641[3] is programmed to 1b, the valid state of the  
input frame pulse and the valid state of the paired input clock  
are logically ANDed and the result is used to indicate the valid  
state of the pair. When validate Fsync ref is programmed to 0b,  
the valid state of the input frame pulse is excluded in reference  
selection and only the valid state of the input clock in the pair is  
used to indicate the valid state of the pair. The valid pair with the  
higher priority index is selected as the DPLL reference and input  
frame pulse to control the phase of the output frame pulse. If no  
pair is valid, the selection does not change and DPLL is switched  
to either holdover or free run mode, and the phase of the output  
frame pulse is not controlled by any of the input frame pulses.  
The five reference switchover modes for frame synchronization  
mode is the same as for normal mode.  
SYNC  
(which is the default) selects the  
SYNC  
pin as the arm method.  
SYNC  
= low means armed;  
If  
is selected as arm method,  
if the register is selected as arm method, Register 0x0641[0] = 1b  
means armed. ARM means that once armed, the output frame  
pulse is edge aligned with the paired output clock edge after the  
rising edge of the input frame pulse.  
LEVEL SENSITIVE MODE AND ONE-SHOT MODE  
The frame synchronization can operate in level sensitive or one-  
shot mode as determined by the Fsync one shot bit (Register  
0x0641[2]). When in level sensitive mode (Register 0x0641[2] =  
0b) and the frame sync ARM signal is high, each rising edge of  
the selected input frame pulse signal is used to control the  
phase of the output frame pulse. When in one-shot mode, after  
the frame sync ARM signal is high, only the immediate next  
rising edge of the selected input frame pulse signal is used to  
control the phase of the output frame pulse (one time phase  
alignment). After that, the phase of the output frame pulse is  
not controlled by the selected input frame pulse. Instead, it  
follows the phase of the input clock of M3 divider. In either  
alignment control mode, the resolution of the phase realignment  
between the input frame pulse and the output frame pulse is  
one clock cycle of the paired clock output.  
Rev. A | Page 40 of 104  
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
This means that in frame synchronization mode, the total divide  
ratio between the RF divider and OUT5 is M0 × M3 × M3b.  
M3b DIVIDER/OUT5 PROGRAMMING IN FRAME  
SYNCHRONIZATION MODE  
The other important change is that the sync signal for the M3b  
divider is no longer the standard clock distribution sync. It is  
controlled by a signal derived from the input frame pulse.  
In frame synchronization mode, the clock distribution signal path  
for OUT5 is changed, as follows: the OUT5 signal goes from the RF  
divider to the M0 divider, and then to the M3 and M3b dividers.  
ACTIVE SYNC  
ACTIVE SYNC  
OUPUT CLOCK  
(OUT0)  
FRAME CLOCK INPUT  
(REFC/REFD)  
ENABLE Fsync  
(REGISTER 0x0640[0] = 1b)  
FRAME SYNC ARM  
(REGISTER OR SYNC PIN)  
FRAME CLOCK  
(OUT5)  
NOTES  
1. AFTER THE FRAME SYNC IS ARMED, THE FRAME CLOCK OUTPUT IS SYNCHRONIZED TO THE FRAME CLOCK INPUT.  
THE SKEW BETWEEN THE FRAME CLOCK INPUT AND FRAME CLOCK OUTPUT IS 15ns (NOMINAL) PLUS A DELAY OF 0.5 TO 1.5 OUTPUT CLOCK CYCLES.  
Figure 41. Frame Synchronization in Level Sensitive Mode  
ACTIVE SYNC  
OUPUT CLOCK  
(OUT0)  
FRAME CLOCK INPUT  
(REFC/REFD)  
ENABLE Fsync  
(REGISTER 0x0640[0] = 1b)  
FRAME SYNC ARM  
(REGISTER OR SYNC PIN)  
FRAME CLOCK  
(OUT5)  
NOTES  
1. AFTER THE FRAME SYNC IS ARMED, THE FRAME CLOCK OUTPUT IS SYNCHRONIZED TO THE FRAME CLOCK INPUT.  
THE SKEW BETWEEN THE FRAME CLOCK INPUT AND FRAME CLOCK OUTPUT IS 15ns (NOMINAL) PLUS 0.5 TO 1.5 OUTPUT CLOCK CYCLES.  
Figure 42. Frame Synchronization in One Shot Mode  
ENABLE Fsync  
M3 DIVIDER  
M3b DIVIDER  
OUT5  
OUT0  
ENABLE  
Fsync  
RF  
DIVIDER 1  
FROM  
APLL  
LOGIC 0  
M0 DIVIDER  
ENABLE Fsync  
CLOCK  
DISTRIBUTION  
SYNC LOGIC  
DELAY  
OUTPUT  
SYNC  
OUTPUT  
SYNC  
PULSE  
LEVEL  
(RETIMED)  
FRAME SYNC  
PULSE GENERATOR  
ENABLE Fsync  
FRAME SYNC PULSE INPUT (ON REFC OR REFD)  
Fsync_arm (FROM EITHER THE SYNC PIN OR THE Arm Soft Fsync BIT IN REGISTER 0x0641[0])  
NOTES  
1. THE ENABLE Fsync FUNCTION IN THE DIAGRAM IS CONTROLLED BY REGISTER 0x0640[0].  
Figure 43. Frame Synchronization Implementation  
Rev. A | Page 41 of 104  
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
STATUS AND CONTROL  
10—The IRQ pin is Logic 0 when deasserted and Logic 1 when  
asserted.  
11—The IRQ pin is Logic 1 when deasserted and Logic 0 when  
asserted. (This is the default operating mode.)  
MULTIFUNCTION PINS (M7 TO M0)  
The AD9558 has eight digital CMOS I/O pins (M7 to M0)  
that are configurable for a variety of uses. To use these  
functions, the user must enable them by writing a 0x01 to  
Register 0x0200. The function of these pins is programmable via  
the register map. Each pin can control or monitor an assortment  
of internal functions based on the contents of Register 0x0201 to  
Register 0x0208.  
The AD9558 asserts the IRQ pin when any bit in the IRQ monitor  
register (Address 0x0D02 to Address 0x0D07) is a Logic 1. Each  
bit in this register is associated with an internal function that is  
capable of producing an interrupt. Furthermore, each bit of the  
IRQ monitor register is the result of a logical AND of the associated  
internal interrupt signal and the corresponding bit in the IRQ  
mask register (Address 0x020A to Address 0x020E). That is, the  
bits in the IRQ mask register have a one-to-one correspondence  
with the bits in the IRQ monitor register. When an internal  
function produces an interrupt signal and the associated IRQ  
mask bit is set, the corresponding bit in the IRQ monitor register  
is set. The user should be aware that clearing a bit in the IRQ  
mask register removes only the mask associated with the  
internal interrupt signal. It does not clear the corresponding bit  
in the IRQ monitor register.  
To monitor an internal function with a multifunction pin, write  
a Logic 1 to the most significant bit of the register associated  
with the desired multifunction pin. The value of the seven least  
significant bits of the register defines the control function, as  
shown in Table 129.  
To control an internal function with a multifunction pin, write a  
Logic 0 to the most significant bit of the register associated with  
the desired multifunction pin. The monitored function depends  
on the value of the seven least significant bits of the register, as  
shown in Table 130.  
If more than one multifunction pin operates on the same  
control signal, then internal priority logic ensures that only one  
multifunction pin serves as the signal source. The selected pin is  
the one with the lowest numeric suffix. For example, if both M0  
and M3 operate on the same control signal, then M0 is used as  
the signal source and the redundant pins are ignored.  
The IRQ pin is the result of a logical OR of all the IRQ monitor  
register bits. Thus, the AD9558 asserts the IRQ pin as long as  
any IRQ monitor register bit is a Logic 1. Note that it is possible  
to have multiple bits set in the IRQ monitor register. Therefore,  
when the AD9558 asserts the IRQ pin, it may indicate an interrupt  
from several different internal functions. The IRQ monitor  
register provides the user with a means to interrogate the  
AD9558 to determine which internal function produced the  
interrupt.  
At power-up, the multifunction pins can be used to force the  
device into certain configurations as defined in the initial pin  
programming section. This functionality, however, is valid only  
during power-up or following a reset, after which the pins can  
be reconfigured via the serial programming port or via the  
EEPROM.  
Typically, when the IRQ pin is asserted, the user interrogates  
the IRQ monitor register to identify the source of the interrupt  
request. After servicing an indicated interrupt, the user should  
clear the associated IRQ monitor register bit via the IRQ  
clearing register (Address 0x0A04 to Address 0x0A09). The bits  
in the IRQ clearing register have a one-to-one correspondence with  
the bits in the IRQ monitor register. Note that the IRQ clearing  
register is autoclearing. The IRQ pin remains asserted until the  
user clears all of the bits in the IRQ monitor register that  
indicate an interrupt.  
If the output SYNC function is to be controlled using an M pin,  
1. First, enable the M pins by writing Register 0x0200 = 0x01.  
2. Issue an I/O update (Register 0x0005 = 0x01).  
3. Set the appropriate M pin function.  
If this process is not followed, a SYNC pulse is issued automatically.  
IRQ Pin  
The AD9558 has a dedicated interrupt request (IRQ) pin.  
Bits[1:0] of the IRQ pin output mode register (Register 0x0209)  
control how the IRQ pin asserts an interrupt based on the value  
of the two bits, as follows:  
It is also possible to collectively clear all of the IRQ monitor  
register bits by setting the clear all IRQs bit in the reset function  
register (Register 0x0A03, Bit 1). Note that this is an autoclearing  
bit. Setting this bit results in deassertion of the IRQ pin.  
Alternatively, the user can program any of the multifunction  
pins to clear all IRQs. This allows the user to clear all IRQs by  
means of a hardware pin rather than by using a serial I/O port  
operation.  
00—The IRQ pin is high impedance when deasserted and active  
low when asserted and requires an external pull-up resistor.  
01—The IRQ pin is high impedance when deasserted and active  
high when asserted and requires an external pull-down  
resistor.  
Rev. A | Page 42 of 104  
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
WATCHDOG TIMER  
EEPROM  
EEPROM Overview  
The watchdog timer is a general purpose programmable timer.  
To set the timeout period, the user writes to the 16-bit watchdog  
timer register (Address 0x0210 to Address 0x0211). A value of  
0b in this register disables the timer. A nonzero value sets the  
timeout period in milliseconds (ms), giving the watchdog timer  
a range of 1 ms to 65.535 sec. The relative accuracy of the timer  
is approximately 0.1% with an uncertainty of 0.5 ms.  
The AD9558 contains an integrated 2048-byte, electrically  
erasable, programmable read-only memory (EEPROM).  
The AD9558 can be configured to perform a download at  
power-up via the multifunction pins (M3 and M2), but uploads  
and downloads can also be done on demand via the EEPROM  
control registers (Address 0x0E00 to Address 0x0E03).  
If enabled, the timer runs continuously and generates a timeout  
event when the timeout period expires. The user has access to  
the watchdog timer status via the IRQ mechanism and the  
multifunction pins (M7 to M0). In the case of the multifunction  
pins, the timeout event of the watchdog timer is a pulse that lasts  
32 system clock periods.  
The EEPROM provides the ability to upload and download  
configuration settings to and from the register map. Figure 44  
shows a functional diagram of the EEPROM.  
Register 0x0E10 to Register 0x0E3F represent a 53-byte EEPROM  
storage sequence area (referred to as the “scratch pad” in this  
section) that enables the user to store a sequence of instructions  
for transferring data to the EEPROM from the device settings  
portion of the register map. Note that the default values for  
these registers provide a sample sequence for saving/retrieving  
all of the AD9558 EEPROM-accessible registers. Figure 44 shows  
the connectivity between the EEPROM and the controller that  
manages data transfer between the EEPROM and the register map.  
There are two ways to reset the watchdog timer (thereby  
preventing it from causing a timeout event). The first is by  
writing a Logic 1 to the autoclearing clear watchdog bit in the  
reset functions register (Register 0x0A03, Bit 0). Alternatively,  
the user can program any of the multifunction pins to reset the  
watchdog timer. This allows the user to reset the timer by means  
of a hardware pin rather than by using a serial I/O port operation.  
The controller oversees the process of transferring EEPROM data  
to and from the register map. There are two modes of operation  
handled by the controller: saving data to the EEPROM (upload  
mode) or retrieving data from the EEPROM (download mode).  
In either case, the controller relies on a specific instruction set.  
DATA  
EEPROM  
ADDRESS  
POINTER  
M3  
M2  
EEPROM  
CONTROLLER  
EEPROM  
(0x000 TO 0x1FF)  
SCRATCH PAD  
ADDRESS  
POINTER  
DEVICE  
SETTINGS  
ADDRESS  
POINTER  
DEVICE  
SCRATCH PAD  
(EEPROM STORAGE SEQUENCE)  
(0x0E10 TO 0x0E45)  
SETTINGS  
(0x0004 TO 0x0A0D)  
SERIAL  
INPUT/OUTPUT  
PORT  
REGISTER MAP  
Figure 44. EEPROM Functional Diagram  
Rev. A | Page 43 of 104  
 
 
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
Table 21. EEPROM Controller Instruction Set  
Instruction  
Value (Hex)  
Bytes  
Required  
Instruction Type  
Description  
0x00 to 0x7F  
Data  
3
A data instruction tells the controller to transfer data to or from the device settings  
part of the register map. A data instruction requires two additional bytes that  
together, indicate a starting address in the register map. Encoded in the data  
instruction is the number of bytes to transfer, which is one more than the  
instruction value.  
0x80  
I/O update  
Calibrate  
1
1
1
1
When the controller encounters this instruction while downloading from the  
EEPROM, it issues a soft I/O update.  
When the controller encounters this instruction while downloading from the  
EEPROM, it initiates a system clock calibration sequence.  
When the controller encounters this instruction while downloading from the  
EEPROM, it issues a sync pulse to the output distribution synchronization.  
B1 to CF are condition instructions and correspond to Condition 1 through  
Condition 31, respectively. B0 is the null condition instruction. See the EEPROM  
Conditional Processing section for details.  
0xA0  
0xA1  
Distribution sync  
Condition  
0xB0 to 0xCF  
0xFE  
0xFF  
Pause  
End  
1
1
When the controller encounters this instruction in the EEPROM storage sequence  
area while uploading to the EEPROM, it holds both the scratch pad address pointer  
and the EEPROM address pointer at its last value. This allows storage of more than  
one instruction sequence in the EEPROM. Note that the controller does not copy  
this instruction to the EEPROM during upload.  
When the controller encounters this instruction in the the EEPROM storage  
sequence area while uploading to the EEPROM, it resets both the register area  
address pointer and the EEPROM address pointer and then enters an idle state.  
When the controller encounters this instruction while downloading from the  
EEPROM, it resets the EEPROM address pointer and then enters an idle state.  
Note that, in the EEPROM scratch pad, the two registers that  
comprise the address portion of a data instruction have the  
MSB of the address in the D7 position of the lower register  
address. The bit weight increases from left to right, from the  
lower register address to the higher register address. Furthermore,  
the starting address always indicates the lowest numbered  
register map address in the range of bytes to transfer. That is,  
the controller always starts at the register map target address  
and counts upward regardless of whether the serial I/O port is  
operating in I2C, SPI LSB-first, or SPI MSB-first mode.  
EEPROM Instructions  
Table 21 lists the EEPROM controller instruction set. The  
controller recognizes all instruction types whether it is in  
upload or download mode, except for the pause instruction,  
which is recognized only in upload mode.  
The I/O update, calibrate, distribution sync, and end instruc-  
tions are mostly self-explanatory. The others, however, warrant  
further detail, as described in the following paragraphs.  
Data instructions are those that have a value from 0x000 to  
0x7FF. A data instruction tells the controller to transfer data  
between the EEPROM and the register map. The controller  
requires the following two parameters to carry out the data  
transfer:  
As part of the data transfer process during an EEPROM upload,  
the controller calculates a 1-byte checksum and stores it as the  
final byte of the data transfer. As part of the data transfer process  
during an EEPROM download, however, the controller again  
calculates a 1-byte checksum value but compares the newly  
calculated checksum with the one that was stored during the  
upload process. If an upload/download checksum pair does not  
match, the controller sets the EEPROM fault status bit. If the  
upload/download checksums match for all data instructions  
encountered during a download sequence, the controller sets  
the EEPROM complete status bit.  
The number of bytes to transfer  
The register map target address  
The controller decodes the number of bytes to transfer directly  
from the data instruction itself by adding one to the value of the  
instruction. For example, the 1A data instruction has a decimal  
value of 26; therefore, the controller knows to transfer 27 bytes  
(one more than the value of the instruction). When the  
controller encounters a data instruction, it knows to read the  
next two bytes in the scratch pad because these contain the  
register map target address.  
Condition instructions are those that have a value from B0 to  
CF. The B1 to CF condition instructions represent Condition 1  
to Condition 31, respectively. The B0 condition instruction is  
special because it represents the null condition (see the  
EEPROM Conditional Processing section).  
Rev. A | Page 44 of 104  
 
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
A pause instruction, like an end instruction, is stored at the  
end of a sequence of instructions in the scratch pad. When the  
controller encounters a pause instruction during an upload  
sequence, it keeps the EEPROM address pointer at its last value.  
This way the user can store a new instruction sequence in the  
scratch pad and upload the new sequence to the EEPROM. The  
new sequence is stored in the EEPROM address locations  
immediately following the previously saved sequence. This  
process is repeatable until an upload sequence contains an end  
instruction. The pause instruction is also useful when used in  
conjunction with condition processing. It allows the EEPROM  
to contain multiple occurrences of the same registers, with each  
occurrence linked to a set of conditions (see the EEPROM  
Conditional Processing section).  
transfers data associated with an active register, it actually  
transfers the buffered contents of the register (refer to the  
Buffered/Active Registers section for details on the difference  
between buffered and active registers). This allows for the transfer  
of nonzero autoclearing register contents.  
Note that conditional processing (see the EEPROM Conditional  
Processing section) does not occur during an upload sequence.  
EEPROM Download  
An EEPROM download results in data transfer from the  
EEPROM to the device register map. To download data,  
the user sets the autoclearing load from the EEPROM bit  
(Register 0x0E03, Bit 1). This commands the controller to  
initiate the EEPROM download process. During download, the  
controller reads the EEPROM data byte-by-byte, incrementing  
the EEPROM address pointer as it goes, until it reaches an end  
instruction. As the controller reads the EEPROM data, it  
executes the stored instructions, which includes transferring  
stored data to the device settings portion of the register map  
when it encounters a data instruction.  
EEPROM Upload  
To upload data to the EEPROM, the user must first ensure that  
the write enable bit (Register 0x0E00, Bit 0) is set. Then, on  
setting the autoclearing save to EEPROM bit (Register 0x0E02,  
Bit 0), the controller initiates the EEPROM data storage process.  
Uploading EEPROM data requires that the user first write an  
instruction sequence into the scratch pad registers. During the  
upload process, the controller reads the scratch pad data byte-  
by-byte, starting at Register 0x0E10 and incrementing the scratch  
pad address pointer, as it goes, until it reaches a pause or end  
instruction.  
Note that conditional processing (see the EEPROM Conditional  
Processing section) is applicable only when downloading.  
Automatic EEPROM Download  
RESET  
Following a power-up, an assertion of the  
pin, or a soft  
reset (Register 0x0000, Bit 5 = 1), if the PINCONTROL pin is  
low, and M3 and M2 are either high or low (see Table 22), the  
instruction sequence stored in the EEPROM executes automatically  
with one of eight conditions. If M3 and M2 are left floating and  
the PINCONTROL pin is low, the EEPROM is bypassed and  
the factory defaults are used. In this way, a previously stored set  
of register values downloads automatically on power-up or with  
a hard or soft reset. See the EEPROM Conditional Processing  
section for details regarding conditional processing and the way  
it modifies the download process.  
As the controller reads the scratch pad data, it transfers the  
data from the scratch pad to the EEPROM (byte-by-byte) and  
increments the EEPROM address pointer accordingly, unless  
it encounters a data instruction. A data instruction tells the  
controller to transfer data from the device settings portion of  
the register map to the EEPROM. The number of bytes to transfer  
is encoded within the data instruction, and the starting address  
for the transfer appears in the next two bytes in the scratch pad.  
When the controller encounters a data instruction, it stores the  
instruction in the EEPROM, increments the EEPROM address  
pointer, decodes the number of bytes to be transferred, and  
increments the scratch pad address pointer. Then it retrieves the  
next two bytes from the scratch pad (the target address) and  
increments the scratch pad address pointer by 2. Next, the  
controller transfers the specified number of bytes from the  
register map (beginning at the target address) to the EEPROM.  
Table 22. EEPROM Setup  
M3  
M2  
ID  
1
2
3
4
0
5
6
7
8
EEPROM Download?  
Yes, EEPROM Condition 1  
Yes, EEPROM Condition 2  
Yes, EEPROM Condition 3  
Yes, EEPROM Condition 4  
No  
Yes, EEPROM Condition 5  
Yes, EEPROM Condition 6  
Yes, EEPROM Condition 7  
Yes, EEPROM Condition 8  
Low  
Low  
Low  
Low  
Open  
High  
Low  
Open  
High  
Low  
Open  
Open  
Open  
High  
High  
High  
When it completes the data transfer, the controller stores an extra  
byte in the EEPROM to serve as a checksum for the transferred  
block of data. To account for the checksum byte, the controller  
increments the EEPROM address pointer by one more than the  
number of bytes transferred. Note that, when the controller  
Open  
High  
Rev. A | Page 45 of 104  
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
EEPROM Conditional Processing  
The condition tag board is a table maintained by the EEPROM  
controller. When the controller encounters a condition instruc-  
tion, it decodes the B1 through CF instructions as Condition = 1  
through Condition = 8, respectively, and tags that particular  
condition in the condition tag board. However, the B0 condition  
instruction decodes as the null condition, for which the controller  
clears the condition tag board; and subsequent download  
instructions execute unconditionally (until the controller  
encounters a new condition instruction).  
The condition instructions allow conditional execution of  
EEPROM instructions during a download sequence. During  
an upload sequence, however, they are stored as is and have  
no effect on the upload process.  
Note that, during EEPROM downloads, the condition instructions  
themselves and the end instruction always execute unconditionally.  
Conditional processing makes use of two elements: the condition  
(from Condition 1 to Condition 8) and the condition tag board.  
The relationships among the condition, the condition tag board,  
and the EEPROM controller appear schematically in Figure 45.  
During download, the EEPROM controller executes or skips  
instructions depending on the value of the condition and the  
contents of the condition tag board. Note, however, that the  
condition instructions and the end instruction always execute  
unconditionally during download. If condition = 0, then all  
instructions during download execute unconditionally. If  
Condition ≠ 0 and there are any tagged conditions in the condition  
tag board, then the controller executes instructions only if the  
condition is tagged. If the condition is not tagged, then the  
controller skips instructions until it encounters a condition  
instruction that decodes as a tagged condition. Note that the  
condition tag board allows for multiple conditions to be tagged  
at any given moment. This conditional processing mechanism  
enables the user to have one download instruction sequence  
with many possible outcomes depending on the value of the  
condition and the order in which the controller encounters  
condition instructions.  
The condition is a 4-bit value with 16 possibilities. Condition = 0  
is the null condition. When the null condition is in effect, the  
EEPROM controller executes all instructions unconditionally.  
Condition 9 through Condition 15 are not accessible using the  
M pins. The remaining eight possibilities (that is, Condition = 1  
through Condition = 8) modify the EEPROM controller’s  
handling of a download sequence. The condition originates  
from one of two sources (see Figure 45), as follows:  
FncInit, Bits[3:0], which is the state of the M2 and M3  
multifunction pins at power-up (see Table 22)  
Register 0x0E01, Bits[3:0]  
If Register 0x0E01, Bits[3:0] ≠ 0, then the condition is the value  
that is stored in Register 0x0E01, Bits[3:0]; otherwise, the condition  
is FncInit, Bits[3:0]. Note that a nonzero condition that is present  
in Register 0x0E01, Bits[3:0] takes precedence over FncInit,  
Bits[3:0].  
M3 AND M2 PINS  
(3-LEVEL LOGIC)  
CONDITION  
TAG BOARD  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
EXAMPLE  
CONDITION 3 AND  
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15  
REGISTER  
FncInit, BITS[3:0]  
4
0x0E01, BITS[3:0]  
CONDITION 13  
ARE TAGGED  
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23  
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31  
4
IF B1 INSTRUCTION CF,  
THEN TAG DECODED CONDITION  
IF {0E01, BITS[3:0] 0}  
CONDITION = 0E01, BITS[3:0]  
ELSE  
CONDITION = FncInit, BITS[3:0]  
ENDIF  
IF INSTRUCTION = B0,  
THEN CLEAR ALL TAGS  
EEPROM  
WATCH FOR  
OCCURRENCE OF  
CONDITION  
4
COND ITION  
INSTRUCTIONS  
DURING  
STORE CONDITION  
INSTRUCTIONS AS  
DOWNLOAD.  
THEY ARE READ FROM  
THE SCRATCH PAD.  
IF {NO TAGS} OR {CONDITION = 0}  
EXECUTE INSTRUCTIONS  
ELSE  
IF {CONDITION ISTAGGED}  
EXECUTE INSTRUCTIONS  
ELSE  
CONDITION  
EXECUTE/SKIP  
HANDLER  
INSTRUCTION(S)  
SKIP INSTRUCTIONS  
ENDIF  
SCRATCH  
PAD  
ENDIF  
UPLOAD  
PROCEDURE  
DOWNLOAD  
PROCEDURE  
EEPROM CONTROLLER  
Figure 45. EEPROM Conditional Processing  
Rev. A | Page 46 of 104  
 
 
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
Table 23 lists a sample EEPROM download instruction sequence.  
It illustrates the use of condition instructions and how they alter  
the download sequence. The table begins with the assumption  
that no conditions are in effect. That is, the most recently executed  
condition instruction is either B0 or no conditional instructions  
have been processed.  
Reprogram the device control registers for the next desired  
setup. Then store a new upload sequence in the EEPROM  
scratch pad with the following general form:  
1. Condition instruction (B0)  
2. The next desired condition instruction (B1 to CF, but  
different from the one used during the previous upload to  
identify a new setup)  
3. Data instructions (to save the register contents) along with  
any required calibrate and/or I/O update instructions  
4. Pause instruction (FE)  
Table 23. EEPROM Conditional Processing Example  
Instruction Action  
0x08  
0x01  
0x00  
0xB1  
0x19  
0x04  
0x00  
0xB2  
0xB3  
0x07  
0x05  
0x00  
0x0A  
Transfer the system clock register contents,  
regardless of the current condition.  
With the upload sequence written to the scratch pad, perform  
an EEPROM upload (Register 0x0E02, Bit 0).  
Tag Condition 1.  
Transfer the clock distribution register contents  
only if tag condition = 1.  
Repeat the process of programming the device control registers  
for a new setup, storing a new upload sequence in the EEPROM  
scratch pad (Step 1 through Step 4), and executing an EEPROM  
upload (Register 0x0E02, Bit 0) until all of the desired setups  
have been uploaded to the EEPROM.  
Tag Condition 2.  
Tag Condition 3.  
Transfer the reference input register contents only  
if tag condition = 1, 2, or 3.  
Note that, on the final upload sequence stored in the scratch  
pad, the pause instruction (FE) must be replaced with an end  
instruction (FF).  
Calibrate the system clock only if tag condition =  
1, 2, or 3.  
To download a specific setup on demand, first store the condition  
associated with the desired setup in Register 0x0E01, Bits[4:0].  
Then perform an EEPROM download (Register 0x0E03, Bit 1).  
Alternatively, to download a specific setup at power-up, apply  
the required logic levels necessary to encode the desired condition  
on the M2 and M3 multifunction pins. Then power up the device;  
an automatic EEPROM download occurs. The condition (as  
established by the M2 and M3 multifunction pins) guides the  
download sequence and results in a specific setup.  
0xB0  
0x80  
Clear the tag condition board.  
Execute an I/O update, regardless of the value of  
the tag condition.  
0x0A  
Calibrate the system clock, regardless of the value  
of the tag condition.  
Storing Multiple Device Setups in EEPROM  
Conditional processing makes it possible to create a number of  
different device setups, store them in EEPROM, and download  
a specific setup on demand. To do so, first program the device  
control registers for a specific setup. Then, store an upload  
sequence in the EEPROM scratch pad with the following  
general form:  
Keep in mind that the number of setups that can be stored  
in the EEPROM is limited. The EEPROM can hold a total of  
2048 bytes. Each nondata instruction requires one byte of  
storage. Each data instruction, however, requires N + 4 bytes of  
storage, where N is the number of transferred register bytes and  
the other four bytes include the data instruction itself (one  
byte), the target address (two bytes), and the checksum  
calculated by the EEPROM controller during the upload  
sequence (one byte).  
1. Condition instruction (B1 to CF) to identify the setup with  
a specific condition (1 to 31)  
2. Data instructions (to save the register contents) along with  
any required calibrate and/or I/O update instructions  
3. Pause instruction (FE)  
With the upload sequence written to the scratch pad, perform  
an EEPROM upload (Register 0x0E02, Bit 0).  
Rev. A | Page 47 of 104  
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
Programming the EEPROM to Configure an M Pin to  
Control Synchronization of Clock Distribution  
The default EEPROM loading sequence from Register 0x0E10 to  
Register 0x0E16 is unchanged. The following steps must be  
inserted into the EEPROM storage sequence:  
A special EEPROM loading sequence is required to use the  
EEPROM to load the registers and to use an M pin to  
enable/disable outputs.  
1. R0x0E17 = 0x00 # Write one byte  
2. R0x0E18 = 0x02 # at Register 0x0200  
3. R0x0E19 = 0x00 #  
4. R0x0E1A = 0x80 # Op code for I/O  
Update R0x0E1B = 0x10 # Transfer 17 instead of 18 bytes  
5. R0x0E1C = 0x02 # Transfer starts at Register address  
6. R0x0E1D = 0x01 # 0x0201 instead of 0x0200  
To control the output sync function by using an M pin, perform  
the following steps:  
1. Enable the M pins by writing Register 0x0200 = 0x01.  
2. Issue an I/O update (Register 0x0005 = 0x01).  
3. Set the appropriate M pin function (see the Clock  
Distribution Synchronization section for details).  
The rest of the EEPROM loading sequence is the same as the  
default EEPROM loading sequence, except that the register  
address of the EEPROM storage sequence is shifted down four  
bytes from the default. For example,  
If this sequence is not performed, a SYNC pulse is issued  
automatically.  
The following changes write Register 0x0200 first and then issue  
an I/O update before writing the remaining M pin configuration  
registers in Register 0x0201 to Register 0x0208.  
R0x0E1E = default value of Register 0x0E1A = 0x2E  
R0x0E1F = default value of Register 0x0E1B = 0x03  
R0x0E20 = default value of Register 0x0E1C = 0x00  
R0x0E40 = default value of Register 0x0E1C = 0x3C = 0xFF  
(end of data)  
Rev. A | Page 48 of 104  
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
SERIAL CONTROL PORT  
The AD9558 serial control port is a flexible, synchronous serial  
communications port that provides a convenient interface to  
many industry-standard microcontrollers and microprocessors.  
The AD9558 serial control port is compatible with most  
synchronous transfer formats, including IꢀC, Motorola SPI, and  
Intel SSR protocols. The serial control port allows read/write  
access to the AD9558 register map.  
CS  
(chip select) pin is an active low control that gates read  
The  
and write operations. This pin is internally connected to a 30 kΩ  
CS  
pull-up resistor. When  
is high, the SDO and SDIO pins go  
into a high impedance state.  
SPI Mode Operation  
The SPI port supports both 3-wire (bidirectional) and 4-wire  
(unidirectional) hardware configurations and both MSB-first  
and LSB-first data formats. Both the hardware configuration  
and data format features are programmable. By default, the  
AD9558 uses the bidirectional MSB-first mode. The reason that  
bidirectional is the default mode is so that the user can still  
write to the device, if it is wired for unidirectional operation, to  
switch to unidirectional mode.  
In SPI mode, single or multiple byte transfers are supported.  
The SPI port configuration is programmable via Register 0x0000.  
This register is integrated into the SPI control logic rather than  
in the register map and is distinct from the I2C Register 0x0000.  
It is also inaccessible to the EEPROM controller.  
Although the AD9558 supports both the SPI and I2C serial port  
protocols, only one or the other is active following power-up (as  
determined by the M0 and M1 multifunction pins during the  
startup sequence). That is, the only way to change the serial port  
protocol is to reset the device (or cycle the device power supply).  
CS  
Assertion (active low) of the  
pin initiates a write or read  
operation to the AD9558 SPI port. For data transfers of three  
bytes or fewer (excluding the instruction word), the device  
CS  
supports the  
stalled high mode (see Table 25). In this mode,  
SPI/I²C PORT SELECTION  
CS  
the  
pin can be temporarily deasserted on any byte boundary,  
allowing time for the system controller to process the next byte.  
Because the AD9558 supports both SPI and IꢀC protocols, the  
active serial port protocol depends on the logic state of the  
PINCONTROL, M1, and M0 pins. The PINCONTROL pin  
must be low, and the state of the M0 and M1 pins determines  
the I2C address, or if SPI mode is enabled. See Table 24 for the  
I2C address assignments.  
CS  
can be deasserted only on byte boundaries, however. This  
applies to both the instruction and data portions of the transfer.  
During stall high periods, the serial control port state machine  
enters a wait state until all data is sent. If the system controller  
decides to abort a transfer midstream, then the state machine must  
CS  
be reset either by completing the transfer or by asserting the  
pin for at least one complete SCLK cycle (but less than eight  
Table 24. SPI/IꢀC Serial Port Setup  
M1  
M0  
SPI/I²C  
CS  
SCLK cycles). Deasserting the  
pin on a nonbyte boundary  
Low  
Low  
SPI  
terminates the serial transfer and flushes the buffer.  
Low  
Low  
Open  
High  
Low  
Open  
High  
Low  
I²C, 1101000  
I²C, 1101001  
I²C, 1101010  
I²C, 1101011  
I²C, 1101100  
I²C, 1101101  
I²C, 1101110  
I²C, 1101111  
In streaming mode (see Table 25), any number of data bytes can  
be transferred in a continuous stream. The register address is  
Open  
Open  
Open  
High  
High  
High  
CS  
automatically incremented or decremented. must be deasserted  
at the end of the last byte that is transferred, thereby ending the  
streaming mode.  
Open  
High  
Table 25. Byte Transfer Count  
W1  
W0  
Bytes to Transfer  
SPI SERIAL PORT OPERATION  
Pin Descriptions  
0
0
0
1
1
2
The SCLK (serial clock) pin serves as the serial shift clock. This  
pin is an input. SCLK synchronizes serial control port read and  
write operations. The rising edge SCLK registers write data bits,  
and the falling edge registers read data bits. The SCLK pin  
supports a maximum clock rate of 40 MHz.  
1
1
0
1
3
Streaming mode  
Communication Cycle—Instruction Plus Data  
The SPI protocol consists of a two-part communication cycle.  
The first part is a 16-bit instruction word that is coincident with  
the first 16 SCLK rising edges and a payload. The instruction  
word provides the AD9558 serial control port with information  
The SDIO (serial data input/output) pin is a dual-purpose pin  
and acts as either an input only (unidirectional mode) or as  
both an input and an output (bidirectional mode). The AD9558  
default SPI mode is bidirectional.  
W
regarding the payload. The instruction word includes the R/  
bit that indicates the direction of the payload transfer (that is, a  
read or write operation). The instruction word also indicates  
the number of bytes in the payload and the starting register  
address of the first payload byte.  
The SDO (serial data output) pin is useful only in unidirectional  
I/O mode. It serves as the data output pin for read operations.  
Rev. A | Page 49 of 104  
 
 
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
Write  
SPI Instruction Word (16 Bits)  
W
If the instruction word indicates a write operation, the payload  
is written into the serial control port buffer of the AD9558. Data  
bits are registered on the rising edge of SCLK. The length of the  
transfer (1, 2, or 3 bytes or streaming mode) depends on the W0  
and W1 bits (see Table 25) in the instruction byte. When not  
The MSB of the 16-bit instruction word is R/ , which indicates  
whether the instruction is a read or a write. The next two bits, W1  
and W0, indicate the number of bytes in the transfer (see Table 25).  
The final 13 bits are the register address (A12 to A0), which  
indicates the starting register address of the read/write operation  
(see Table 27).  
CS  
streaming,  
can be deasserted after each sequence of eight  
bits to stall the bus (except after the last byte, where it ends the  
cycle). When the bus is stalled, the serial transfer resumes when  
SPI MSB-/LSB-First Transfers  
The AD9558 instruction word and payload can be MSB first or  
LSB first. The default for the AD9558 is MSB first. The LSB-first  
mode can be set by writing a 1 to Register 0x0000, Bit 6.  
Immediately after the LSB-first bit is set, subsequent serial  
control port operations are LSB first.  
CS  
CS  
is asserted. Deasserting the  
pin on a nonbyte boundary  
resets the serial control port. Reserved or blank registers are not  
skipped over automatically during a write sequence. Therefore,  
the user must know what bit pattern to write to the reserved  
registers to preserve proper operation of the part. Generally, it  
does not matter what data is written to blank registers, but it is  
customary to write 0s.  
When MSB-first mode is active, the instruction and data bytes  
must be written from MSB to LSB. Multibyte data transfers in  
MSB-first format start with an instruction byte that includes the  
register address of the most significant payload byte. Subsequent  
data bytes must follow in order from high address to low  
address. In MSB-first mode, the serial control port internal  
address generator decrements for each data byte of the multi-  
byte transfer cycle.  
Most of the serial port registers are buffered (refer to the  
Buffered/Active Registers section for details on the difference  
between buffered and active registers). Therefore, data written into  
buffered registers does not take effect immediately. An  
additional operation is required to transfer buffered serial  
control port contents to the registers that actually control the  
device. This is accomplished with an I/O update operation,  
which is performed in one of two ways. One is by writing a  
Logic 1 to Register 0x0005, Bit 0 (this bit is autoclearing). The  
other is to use an external signal via an appropriately  
programmed multifunction pin. The user can change as many  
register bits as desired before executing an I/O update. The I/O  
update operation transfers the buffer register contents to their  
active register counterparts.  
When Register 0x0000, Bit 6 = 1 (LSB first), the instruction and  
data bytes must be written from LSB to MSB. Multibyte data  
transfers in LSB-first format start with an instruction byte that  
includes the register address of the least significant payload byte  
followed by multiple data bytes. The serial control port internal  
byte address generator increments for each byte of the multibyte  
transfer cycle.  
For multibyte MSB-first (default) I/O operations, the serial  
control port register address decrements from the specified  
starting address toward Address 0x0000. For multibyte LSB-first  
I/O operations, the serial control port register address  
increments from the starting address toward Address 0x1FFF.  
Reserved addresses are not skipped during multibyte I/O  
operations; therefore, the user should write the default value to  
a reserved register and 0s to unmapped registers. Note that it is  
more efficient to issue a new write command than to write the  
default value to more than two consecutive reserved (or  
unmapped) registers.  
Read  
The AD9558 supports the long instruction mode only. If the  
instruction word indicates a read operation, the next N × 8  
SCLK cycles clock out the data from the address specified in the  
instruction word. N is the number of data bytes read and  
depends on the W0 and W1 bits of the instruction word. The  
readback data is valid on the falling edge of SCLK. Blank  
registers are not skipped over during readback.  
A readback operation takes data from either the serial control  
port buffer registers or the active registers, as determined by  
Register 0x0004, Bit 0.  
Table 26. Streaming Mode (No Addresses Are Skipped)  
Write Mode Address Direction Stop Sequence  
LSB First  
MSB First  
Increment  
Decrement  
0x0000 ... 0x1FFF  
0x1FFF ... 0x0000  
Table 27. Serial Control Port, 16-Bit Instruction Word, MSB First  
MSB  
LSB  
I0  
I15  
I14  
I13  
I12  
I11  
I10  
I9  
I8  
I7  
I6  
I5  
I4  
A4  
I3  
I2  
I1  
R/W  
W1  
W0  
A12  
A11  
A10  
A9  
A8  
A7  
A6  
A5  
A3  
A2  
A1  
A0  
Rev. A | Page 50 of 104  
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
CS  
SCLK DON'T CARE  
DON'T CARE  
DON'T CARE  
DON'T CARE  
SDIO  
R/W W1 W0 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0  
16-BIT INSTRUCTION HEADER REGISTER (N) DATA REGISTER (N – 1) DATA  
Figure 46. Serial Control Port Write—MSB First, 16-Bit Instruction, Two Bytes of Data  
CS  
SCLK  
DON'T CARE  
R/W W1 W0 A12 A11A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0  
DON'T CARE  
SDIO  
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0  
REGISTER (N) DATA REGISTER (N – 1) DATA REGISTER (N – 2) DATA REGISTER (N – 3) DATA  
SDO DON'T CARE  
16-BIT INSTRUCTION HEADER  
DON'T  
CARE  
Figure 47. Serial Control Port Read—MSB First, 16-Bit Instruction, Four Bytes of Data  
tDS  
tHIGH  
tS  
tC  
tCLK  
tDH  
tLOW  
CS  
DON'T CARE  
DON'T CARE  
DON'T CARE  
SCLK  
SDIO  
R/W  
W1  
W0  
A12  
A11  
A10  
A9  
A8  
A7  
A6  
A5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
DON'T CARE  
Figure 48. Serial Control Port Write—MSB First, 16-Bit Instruction, Timing Measurements  
CS  
SCLK  
tDV  
SDIO  
SDO  
DATA BIT N  
DATA BIT N – 1  
Figure 49. Timing Diagram for Serial Control Port Register Read  
CS  
SCLK  
SDIO  
DON'T CARE  
DON'T CARE  
DON'T CARE  
DON'T CARE  
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 W0 W1 R/W D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7  
16-BIT INSTRUCTION HEADER REGISTER (N) DATA REGISTER (N + 1) DATA  
Figure 50. Serial Control Port Write—LSB First, 16-Bit Instruction, Two Bytes of Data  
Rev. A | Page 51 of 104  
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
tS  
tC  
CS  
tCLK  
tHIGH  
tLOW  
tDS  
SCLK  
SDIO  
tDH  
BIT N  
BIT N + 1  
Figure 51. Serial Control Port Timing—Write  
Table 28. Serial Control Port Timing  
Parameter  
Description  
tDS  
tDH  
tCLK  
tS  
Setup time between data and the rising edge of SCLK  
Hold time between data and the rising edge of SCLK  
Period of the clock  
Setup time between the CS falling edge and the SCLK rising edge (start of the communication cycle)  
Setup time between the SCLK rising edge and CS rising edge (end of the communication cycle)  
Minimum period that SCLK should be in a logic high state  
tC  
tHIGH  
tLOW  
tDV  
Minimum period that SCLK should be in a logic low state  
SCLK to valid SDIO and SDO (see Figure 49)  
Rev. A | Page 52 of 104  
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
The transfer of data is shown in Figure 52. One clock pulse is  
I²C SERIAL PORT OPERATION  
generated for each data bit transferred. The data on the SDA  
line must be stable during the high period of the clock. The  
high or low state of the data line can change only when the  
clock signal on the SCL line is low.  
The I2C interface has the advantage of requiring only two control  
pins and is a de facto standard throughout the I2C industry.  
However, its disadvantage is programming speed, which is  
400 kbps maximum. The AD9558 IꢀC port design is based on the  
IꢀC fast mode standard; therefore, it supports both the 100 kHz  
standard mode and 400 kHz fast mode. Fast mode imposes a  
glitch tolerance requirement on the control signals. That is, the  
input receivers ignore pulses of less than 50 ns duration.  
SDA  
SCL  
The AD9558 IꢀC port consists of a serial data line (SDA) and a  
serial clock line (SCL). In an IꢀC bus system, the AD9558 is  
connected to the serial bus (data bus SDA and clock bus SCL)  
as a slave device; that is, no clock is generated by the AD9558.  
The AD9558 uses direct 16-bit memory addressing instead of  
traditional 8-bit memory addressing.  
DATA LINE  
STABLE;  
CHANGE  
OF DATA  
ALLOWED  
DATA VALID  
Figure 52. Valid Bit Transfer  
Start/stop functionality is shown in Figure 53. The start  
condition is characterized by a high-to-low transition on the  
SDA line while SCL is high. The start condition is always  
generated by the master to initialize a data transfer. The stop  
condition is characterized by a low-to-high transition on the  
SDA line while SCL is high. The stop condition is always  
generated by the master to terminate a data transfer. Every byte  
on the SDA line must be eight bits long. Each byte must be  
followed by an acknowledge bit; bytes are sent MSB first.  
The AD9558 allows up to seven unique slave devices to occupy  
the I2C bus. These are accessed via a 7-bit slave address that is  
transmitted as part of an I2C packet. Only the device that has a  
matching slave address responds to subsequent I2C commands.  
Table 24 lists the supported device slave addresses.  
I2C Bus Characteristics  
A summary of the various I2C protocols appears in Table 29.  
The acknowledge bit (A) is the ninth bit attached to any 8-bit  
data byte. An acknowledge bit is always generated by the  
receiving device (receiver) to inform the transmitter that the  
byte has been received. It is done by pulling the SDA line low  
during the ninth clock pulse after each 8-bit data byte.  
Table 29. I2C Bus Abbreviation Definitions  
Abbreviation  
Definition  
S
Start  
Sr  
P
Repeated start  
Stop  
A
The nonacknowledge bit ( ) is the ninth bit attached to any 8-  
A
A
W
R
Acknowledge  
Nonacknowledge  
Write  
bit data byte. A nonacknowledge bit is always generated by the  
receiving device (receiver) to inform the transmitter that the  
byte has not been received. It is done by leaving the SDA line  
high during the ninth clock pulse after each 8-bit data byte.  
Read  
SDA  
SCL  
S
P
START CONDITION  
STOP CONDITION  
Figure 53. Start and Stop Conditions  
MSB  
SDA  
SCL  
ACK FROM  
SLAVE RECEIVER  
ACK FROM  
SLAVE RECEIVER  
3 TO 7  
8
9
3 TO 7  
8
9
10  
P
1
2
1
2
S
Figure 54. Acknowledge Bit  
Rev. A | Page 53 of 104  
 
 
 
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
per transfer is unrestricted. In write mode, the first two data  
Data Transfer Process  
bytes immediately after the slave address byte are the internal  
memory (control registers) address bytes, with the high address  
byte first. This addressing scheme gives a memory address of up  
to ꢀ16 − 1 = 65,535. The data bytes after these two memory address  
bytes are register data written to or read from the control registers.  
In read mode, the data bytes after the slave address byte are  
register data written to or read from the control registers.  
The master initiates data transfer by asserting a start condition.  
This indicates that a data stream follows. All I2C slave devices  
connected to the serial bus respond to the start condition.  
The master then sends an 8-bit address byte over the SDA line,  
W
consisting of a 7-bit slave address (MSB first) plus an R/ bit.  
This bit determines the direction of the data transfer, that is,  
whether data is written to or read from the slave device (0 =  
write, 1 = read).  
When all data bytes are read or written, stop conditions are  
established. In write mode, the master (transmitter) asserts  
a stop condition to end data transfer during the 10th clock pulse  
following the acknowledge bit for the last data byte from the slave  
device (receiver). In read mode, the master device (receiver)  
receives the last data byte from the slave device (transmitter) but  
does not pull SDA low during the ninth clock pulse. This is known  
as a nonacknowledge bit. By receiving the nonacknowledge bit,  
the slave device knows that the data transfer is finished and  
enters idle mode. The master then takes the data line low  
during the low period before the 10th clock pulse, and high  
during the 10th clock pulse to assert a stop condition.  
The peripheral whose address corresponds to the transmitted  
address responds by sending an acknowledge bit. All other  
devices on the bus remain idle while the selected device waits  
W
for data to be read from or written to it. If the R/ bit is 0, the  
master (transmitter) writes to the slave device (receiver). If the  
W
R/ bit is 1, the master (receiver) reads from the slave device  
(transmitter).  
The format for these commands is described in the Data Transfer  
Format section.  
Data is then sent over the serial bus in the format of nine clock  
pulses, one data byte (eight bits) from either master (write mode)  
or slave (read mode) followed by an acknowledge bit from the  
receiving device. The number of bytes that can be transmitted  
A start condition can be used in place of a stop condition.  
Furthermore, a start or stop condition can occur at any time,  
and partially transferred bytes are discarded.  
MSB  
SDA  
ACK FROM  
SLAVE RECEIVER  
ACK FROM  
SLAVE RECEIVER  
3 TO 7  
8
9
3 TO 7  
8
9
10  
P
1
2
1
2
SCL  
S
Figure 55. Data Transfer Process (Master Write Mode, 2-Byte Transfer)  
SDA  
ACK FROM  
MASTER RECEIVER  
NON-ACK FROM  
MASTER RECEIVER  
SCL  
3 TO 7  
8
9
3 TO 7  
8
9
10  
P
1
2
1
2
S
Figure 56. Data Transfer Process (Master Read Mode, 2-Byte Transfer)  
Rev. A | Page 54 of 104  
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
Data Transfer Format  
Write byte format—the write byte protocol is used to write a register address to the RAM starting from the specified RAM address.  
S
Slave  
address  
W
A
RAM address  
high byte  
A
RAM address  
low byte  
A
RAM  
Data 0  
A
RAM  
Data 1  
A
RAM  
Data 2  
A
P
Send byte format—the send byte protocol is used to set up the register address for subsequent reads.  
Slave address RAM address high byte RAM address low byte  
S
W
A
A
A
P
Receive byte format—the receive byte protocol is used to read the data byte(s) from RAM starting from the current address.  
Slave address RAM Data 0 RAM Data 1 RAM Data 2  
S
R
A
A
A
A
P
Read byte format—the combined format of the send byte and the receive byte.  
S
Slave  
Address  
W
A
RAM  
Address  
High Byte  
A
RAM  
Address  
Low Byte  
A
Sr Slave  
R
A
RAM  
Data 0  
A
RAM  
Data 1  
A
RAM  
Data 2  
A
P
Address  
I²C Serial Port Timing  
SDA  
tLOW  
tR  
tSU; DAT  
tBUF  
tHD; STA  
tR  
tF  
tSP  
tF  
SCL  
tSU; STA  
tSU; STO  
tHD; STA  
tHIGH  
tHD; DAT  
S
Sr  
S
P
Figure 57. I²C Serial Port Timing  
Table 30. IꢀC Timing Definitions  
Parameter  
Description  
fSCL  
Serial clock  
tBUF  
Bus free time between stop and start conditions  
Repeated hold time start condition  
Repeated start condition setup time  
Stop condition setup time  
Data hold time  
Date setup time  
tHD; STA  
tSU; STA  
tSU; STO  
tHD; DAT  
tSU; DAT  
tLOW  
SCL clock low period  
tHIGH  
SCL clock high period  
tR  
tF  
Minimum/maximum receive SCL and SDA rise time  
Minimum/maximum receive SCL and SDA fall time  
tSP  
Pulse width of voltage spikes that must be suppressed by the input filter  
Rev. A | Page 55 of 104  
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
PROGRAMMING THE I/O REGISTERS  
The register map spans an address range from 0x0000 through  
0x0E3C. Each address provides access to 1 byte (eight bits) of  
data. Each individual register is identified by its four-digit  
hexadecimal address (for example, Register 0x0A10). In some  
cases, a group of addresses collectively defines a register.  
REGISTER ACCESS RESTRICTIONS  
Read and write access to the register map may be restricted  
depending on the register in question, the source and direction  
of access, and the current state of the device. Each register can  
be classified into one or more access types. When more than  
one type applies, the most restrictive condition is the one that  
applies.  
In general, when a group of registers defines a control  
parameter, the LSB of the value resides in the D0 position of the  
register with the lowest address. The bit weight increases right  
to left, from the lowest register address to the highest register  
address.  
When access is denied to a register, all attempts to read the  
register return a 0 byte, and all attempts to write to the register  
are ignored. Access to nonexistent registers is handled in the  
same way as for a denied register.  
Note that the EEPROM storage sequence registers (Address  
0x0E10 to Address 0x0E3C) are an exception to the above  
convention (see the EEPROM Instructions section).  
Regular Access  
Registers with regular access do not fall into any other category.  
Both read and write access to registers of this type can be from  
either the serial ports or the EEPROM controller. However, only  
one of these sources can have access to a register at any given  
time (access is mutually exclusive). When the EEPROM controller  
is active, in either load or store mode, it has exclusive access to  
these registers.  
BUFFERED/ACTIVE REGISTERS  
There are two copies of most registers: buffered and active. The  
value in the active registers is the one that is in use. The buffered  
registers are the ones that take effect the next time the user  
writes 0x01 to the I/O update register (Register 0x0005).  
Buffering the registers allows the user to update a group of  
registers (like the digital loop filter coefficients) at the same  
time, which avoids the potential of unpredictable behavior in  
the part. Registers with an L in the option column are live,  
meaning that they take effect the moment the serial port  
transfers that data byte.  
Read-Only Access  
An R in the option column of the register map identifies read-  
only registers. Access is available at all times, including when  
the EEPROM controller is active. Note that read-only registers  
(R) are inaccessible to the EEPROM, as well.  
AUTOCLEAR REGISTERS  
Exclusion from EEPROM Access  
An A in the option column of the register map identifies an  
autoclear register. Typically, the active value for an autoclear  
register takes effect following an I/O update. The bit is cleared  
by the internal device logic upon completion of the prescribed  
action.  
An E in the option column of the register map identifies a  
register with contents that are inaccessible to the EEPROM.  
That is, the contents of this type of register cannot be  
transferred directly to the EEPROM or vice versa. Note that  
read-only registers (R) are inaccessible to the EEPROM, as well.  
Rev. A | Page 56 of 104  
 
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
THERMAL PERFORMANCE  
Table 31. Thermal Parameters for the 64-Lead LFCSP Package  
Symbol  
Thermal Characteristic Using a JEDEC51-7 Plus JEDEC51-5 2S2P Test Board1  
Value2 Unit  
θJA  
Junction-to-ambient thermal resistance, 0.0 m/sec airflow per JEDEC JESD51-2 (still air)  
Junction-to-ambient thermal resistance, 1.0 m/sec airflow per JEDEC JESD51-6 (moving air)  
Junction-to-ambient thermal resistance, 2.5 m/sec airflow per JEDEC JESD51-6 (moving air)  
Junction-to-board thermal resistance, 0.0 m/sec airflow per JEDEC JESD51-8 (still air)  
Junction-to-case thermal resistance (die-to-heat sink) per MIL-Std 883, Method 1012.1  
Junction-to-top-of-package characterization parameter, 0 m/sec airflow per JEDEC JESD51-2 (still air)  
21.7  
18.9  
16.9  
11.3  
1.2  
°C/W  
°C/W  
°C/W  
°C/W  
°C/W  
°C/W  
θJMA  
θJMA  
θJB  
θJC  
ΨJT  
0.1  
1 The exposed pad on the bottom of the package must be soldered to ground to achieve the specified thermal performance.  
2 Results are from simulations. The PCB is a JEDEC multilayer type. Thermal performance for actual applications requires careful inspection of the conditions in the  
application to determine if they are similar to those assumed in these calculations.  
The AD9558 is specified for a case temperature (TCASE). To ensure  
that TCASE is not exceeded, an airflow source can be used. Use  
the following equation to determine the junction temperature  
on the application PCB:  
Values of θJA are provided for package comparison and PCB  
design considerations. θJA can be used for a first order approx-  
imation of TJ by the equation  
TJ = TA + (θJA × PD)  
TJ = TCASE + (ΨJT × PD)  
where TA is the ambient temperature (°C).  
where:  
Values of θJC are provided for package comparison and PCB  
design considerations when an external heat sink is required.  
TJ is the junction temperature (°C).  
TCASE is the case temperature (°C) measured by the customer at  
Values of θJB are provided for package comparison and PCB  
design considerations.  
the top center of the package.  
ΨJT is the value as indicated in Table 31.  
PD is the power dissipation (see Table 3).  
Rev. A | Page 57 of 104  
 
 
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
POWER SUPPLY PARTITIONS  
The AD9558 power supplies are divided into four groups:  
DVDD3, DVDD, AVDD3, and AVDD. All power and ground  
pins should be connected, even if certain blocks of the chip are  
powered down.  
The ADP7104 is another good choice for converting 3.3 V to  
1.8 V. The close-in noise of the ADP7104 is lower than that of  
the ADP222; therefore, it may be better suited for applications  
where close-in phase noise is critical and the AD9557 DPLL loop  
bandwidth is <50 Hz. In such cases, all 1.8 V supplies can be  
connected to one ADP7104.  
RECOMMENDED CONFIGURATION FOR 3.3 V  
SWITCHING SUPPLY  
Use of Ferrite Beads on 1.8 V Supplies  
A popular power supply arrangement is to power the AD9558  
with the output of a 3.3 V switching power supply.  
To ensure the very best output-to-output isolation, one ferrite  
bead should be used instead of a bypass capacitor for each of  
the following AVDD pins: Pin 12, Pin 22, Pin 29, and Pin 30. The  
ferrite beads should be placed in between the 1.8 V LDO output  
and each pin listed above. Ferrite beads that have low (<0.7 Ω)  
dc resistance and approximately 600 Ω impedance at 100 MHz  
are suitable for this application.  
When the AD9558 is powered using 3.3 V switching power  
supplies, all of the 3.3 V supplies can be connected to the 3.3 V  
switcher output, and a 0.1 ꢃF bypass capacitor should be placed  
adjacent to each 3.3 V power supply pin.  
CONFIGURATION FOR 1.8 V SUPPLY  
When 1.8 V supplies are preferred, it is recommended that an  
LDO regulator, such as the ADP222, be used to generate the  
1.8 V supply from the 3.3 V supply.  
See Table 2 for the current consumed by each group. Refer to  
Figure 20, Figure 21, and Figure 22 for information on the  
power consumption vs. output frequency.  
The ADP222 offers excellent power supply rejection in a small  
(2 mm × 2 mm) package. It has two 1.8 V outputs. One output  
can be used for the DVDD pins (Pin 6, Pin 34, and Pin 35), and  
the other output can drive the AVDD pins.  
Rev. A | Page 58 of 104  
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
PIN PROGRAM FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
The AD9558 supports both hard pin and soft pin program  
function with the on-chip ROM containing the predefined  
configurations. When a pin program function is enabled and  
initiated, the selected predefined configuration is transferred  
from the ROM to the corresponding registers to configure the  
part into the desired state.  
RF divider register  
Clock distribution channel divider register  
All configurations are set to support one single system clock  
frequency as 786.432 MHz (16× the default 49.152 MHz system  
clock reference frequency).  
Four Different System Clock PLL Configurations  
OVERVIEW OF ON-CHIP ROM FEATURES  
REF = 49.152 MHz XO (×2 on, N = 8)  
REF = 49.152 MHz XTAL (×2 on, N = 8)  
REF = 24.756 MHz XTAL (×2 on, N = 16)  
REF = 98.304 MHz XO (×2 off, N = 8)  
Input/Output Frequency Translation Configuration  
The AD9558 has one on-chip ROM that contains a total of 256  
different input-output frequency translation configurations for  
independent selection of 16 input frequencies and 16 output  
frequencies. Each input/output frequency translation configuration  
assumes that all input frequencies are the same and all the output  
frequencies are the same. Each configuration reprograms the  
following registers/parameters:  
Four Different DPLL Loop Bandwidths  
1 Hz, 10 Hz, 50 Hz, 100 Hz  
DPLL Phase Margin  
Normal phase margin (70°)  
High phase margin (88.5°)  
Reference input period register  
Reference divider R register  
Digital PLL feedback divider register (Fractional Part  
FRAC1, Modulus Part MOD1 and Integer Part N1) free run  
Tuning word register  
The ROM also contains an APLL VCO calibration bit. This bit  
is used to program Register 0x0405[0] (from 0) to 1 to generate  
a low-high transition to automatically initiate APLL VCO cal.  
Output PLL feedback divider N2 register  
Table 32. Preset Input Frequencies for Hard Pin and Soft Pin Programming  
Soft Pin Program  
PINCONTROL = Low  
Register 0x0C01[3:0]  
Hard Pin Program  
PINCONTROL = High  
Freq ID  
Frequency (MHz)  
0.008  
19.44  
25  
125  
156.7072  
622.08  
625  
644.53125  
657.421875  
660.184152  
669.3266  
672.1627  
690.569  
693.48299  
693.482991  
698.81236  
Frequency Description  
8 kHz  
19.44 MHz  
25 MHz  
125 MHz  
156..25 MHz × 1027/1024  
622.08 MHz  
625 MHz  
625 MHz × 33/32  
657.421875 MHz  
657.421875 MHz × 239/238  
622.08 MHz × 255/238  
622.08 MHz × 255/236  
622.08 MHz × 255/236  
644.53125 MHz × 255/238  
644.53125 MHz × 255/237  
622.08 × 255/237  
M5 Pin  
M4 Pin  
M0 Pin  
B3  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
B2  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
B1  
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
B0  
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
½
½
½
1
1
1
0
0
0
½
½
½
1
0
½
1
0
½
1
0
½
1
0
½
1
8
9
0
½
½
½
½
½
½
½
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
0
½
1
0
Rev. A | Page 59 of 104  
 
 
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
Table 33. Preset Output Frequencies for Hard Pin and Soft Pin Programming  
Soft Pin Program  
PINCONTROL = Low,  
Register 0x0C01[3:0]  
Hard Pin Program  
PINCONTROL = High  
Freq ID Frequency (MHz) Frequency Description  
M3  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
M2  
0
0
M1  
B7  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
B6  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
B5  
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
B4  
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
19.44  
19.44 MHz  
0
½
1
0
½
1
0
½
1
0
½
1
1
25  
25 MHz  
2
125  
125 MHz  
0
3
4
156.7071  
622.08  
156.25 MHz × 1027/1024  
622.08 MHz  
½
½
½
1
1
1
0
0
0
½
½
½
1
5
625  
625 MHz  
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
644.53125  
657.421875  
660.184152  
666.5143  
669.3266  
672.1627  
690.5692  
693.4830  
698.8124  
704.380580  
625 MHz × 33/32  
657.421875 MHz  
657.421875 MHz × 239/238  
622.08 MHz × 255/238  
622.08 MHz × 255/237  
622.08 MHz × 255/236  
644.53125 MHz × 255/238  
644.53125 MHz × 255/237  
622.08 MHz × 255/237  
657.421875 MHz × 255/238  
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
½
½
½
½
½
½
½
0
½
1
0
Table 34. System Clock Configuration in Hard Pin and Soft Pin Programming Modes  
Equivalent  
System Clock  
PLL Register  
Settings  
Hard Pin Program  
PINCONTROL = High,  
IRQ Pin  
Soft Pin Program  
PINCONTROL = Low,  
Register 0x0C02[1:0]  
Freq ID Frequency (MHz) System Clock Configuration  
IRQ Pin  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
0
1
2
3
49.152  
49.152  
24.576  
98.304  
XTAL mode, doubler on, N = 8  
XTAL mode off, doubler on, N = 8  
XTAL mode, doubler on, N = 16  
XTAL mode off, doubler off, N = 8  
0
½
1
N/A  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0001, 0000, 1000  
The system clock configuration is controlled by the state of the  
IRQ pin at startup (see Table 34 for details). The digital PLL  
loop bandwidth, reference input frequency accuracy tolerance  
ranges, and DPLL phase margin selection are not available in  
hard pin programming mode unless the user uses the serial port  
to change their default values.  
HARD PIN PROGRAMMING MODE  
The state of the PINCONTROL pin at power-up controls whether  
or not the chip is in hard pin programming mode. Setting the  
PINCONTROL pin high disables the I2C protocol, although the  
register map can be accessed via the SPI protocol.  
The M0, M5, and M4 pins select one of 16 input frequencies, and  
the M3 to M1 pins select one of 16 possible output frequencies. See  
Table 32 and Table 33 for details.  
When in hard pin programming mode, the user must set  
Register 0x0200[0] = 1 to activate the IRQ, REF status, and PLL  
lock status signals at the multifunction pins.  
Rev. A | Page 60 of 104  
 
 
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
Address 0x0C06[3:2] select one of four DPLL loop  
bandwidths.  
SOFT PIN PROGRAMMING OVERVIEW  
The soft pin program function is controlled by a dedicated  
register section (Address 0x0C00 to Address 0x0C08). The  
purpose of soft pin program is to use the register bits to mimic  
the hard pins for the configuration section. When in soft pin  
program mode, both SPI and I2C port are available.  
Address 0x0C06[4] selects the DPLL phase margin.  
Address 0x0C04[3:0] scales the REFA/REFB/REFC/REFD  
input frequency down by divide-by-1, divide-by-4, divide-  
by-8, divide-by-16 independently. For example, when  
Address 0x0C01[3:0] = 0101 to select input frequency as  
622.08 MHz for all REFA/REFB/REFC/REFD, setting  
Address 0x0C04[1:0] = 0x01 scales down the REFA input  
frequency to 155.52 MHz (= 622.08 MHz/4). This is done  
by internally scaling the R divider for REFA up by 4× and  
the REFA period up by 4×.  
Address 0x0C00[0] enables accessibility to Address 0x0C01  
and Address 0x0C02 (Soft Pin Section 1). This bit must be  
set in soft pin mode.  
Address 0x0C03[0] enables accessibility to Address 0x0C04 to  
Address 0x0C06 (Soft Pin Section 2). This bit must be set  
in soft pin mode.  
Address 0x0C05[3:0] scales the Channel 0/1/2/3 output  
frequency down by divide-by-1, divide-by-4, divide-by-8,  
or divide-by-16. (Channel 2 and Channel 3 are available  
only for the AD9558).  
Address 0x0C01[3:0] select one of 16 input frequencies.  
Address 0x0C01[7:4] select one of 16 output frequencies.  
Address 0x0C02[1:0] select the system clock configuration.  
Address 0x0C06[1:0] select one of four input frequency  
tolerance ranges.  
Rev. A | Page 61 of 104  
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
REGISTER MAP  
Register addresses that are not listed in Table 35 are not used, and writing to those registers has no effect. The user should write the  
default value to sections of registers marked reserved. R = read-only. A = autoclear. E = excluded from EEPROM loading. L = live (I/O  
update not required for register to take effect or for a read-only register to be updated).  
Table 35. Register Map  
Reg  
Addr  
(Hex)  
Opt  
Name  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Def  
Serial Control Port Configuration and Part Identification  
0x0000  
L, E  
L
SPI control  
I²C control  
SDO enable  
LSB first/  
increment  
address  
Soft reset  
Reserved  
Reserved  
00  
0x0000  
0x0004  
Reserved  
Soft reset  
00  
00  
Readback  
control  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Read buffer  
register  
0x0005  
0x0006  
0x0007  
0x000A  
0x000B  
0x000C  
0x000D  
A, L  
L
I/O update  
I/O update  
00  
00  
00  
21  
0F  
01  
00  
User scratch  
pad  
User scratch pad[7:0]  
User scratch pad[15:8]  
Silicon revision[7:0]  
Reserved  
L
R, L  
R, L  
R, L  
R, L  
Silicon rev  
Reserved  
Part ID  
Clock part family ID[7:0]  
Clock part family ID[15:8]  
System Clock  
0x0100  
SYSCLK config  
PLL feedback  
divider  
System clock N divider[7:0]  
08  
0x0101  
Reserved  
Load from  
ROM  
SYSCLK XTAL  
enable  
SYSCLK P divider[1:0]  
SYSCLK  
doubler  
enable  
09  
or  
19  
(reserved)  
0x0102  
0x0103  
0x0104  
0x0105  
0x0106  
0x0107  
Reserved  
Reserved  
00  
0E  
67  
13  
32  
00  
00  
SYSCLK period  
Nominal system clock period (fs), Bits[7:0] (1 ns at 1 ppm accuracy)  
Nominal system clock period (fs), Bits[15:8] (1 ns at 1 ppm accuracy)  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Nominal system clock period (fs), Bits[20:16]  
SYSCLK  
stability  
System clock stability period (ms), Bits[7:0]  
System clock stability period (ms), Bits[15:8]  
0x0108  
A
Reset  
SYSCLK  
System clock stability period (ms), Bits[19:16]  
(not autoclearing)  
stab timer  
(autoclear)  
General Configuration  
0x0200  
EN_MPIN  
Reserved  
Enable M pins  
and IRQ pin  
function  
00  
0x0201  
0x0202  
M0FUNC  
M1FUNC  
input  
Function[6:0]  
Function[6:0]  
B0  
B1  
Output/  
input  
input  
input  
input  
input  
input  
input  
Output/  
0x0203  
0x0204  
0x0205  
0x0206  
0x0207  
0x0208  
M2FUNC  
M3FUNC  
M4FUNC  
M5func  
Function[6:0]  
Function[6:0]  
Function[6:0]  
Function[6:0]  
Function[6:0]  
Function[6:0]  
C0  
C1  
B2  
B3  
C2  
C3  
Output/  
Output/  
Output/  
Output/  
Output/  
Output/  
M6FUNC  
M7FUNC  
Rev. A | Page 62 of 104  
 
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
Reg  
Addr  
(Hex)  
Opt  
Name  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
IRQ pin driver type[1:0]  
Def  
0x0209  
IRQ pin  
output mode  
Reserved  
Status signal  
at IRQ pin[1:0]  
Use IRQ pin  
for status  
signal  
1F  
0x020A  
0x020B  
IRQ mask  
Reserved  
SYSCLK  
unlocked  
SYSCLK  
locked  
APLL  
unlocked  
APLL  
locked  
APLL cal  
complete  
APLL cal  
started  
00  
00  
Reserved  
Pin  
program  
end  
Sync  
distribution  
Watchdog  
timer  
EEPROM fault  
EEPROM  
complete  
0x020C  
0x020D  
0x020E  
Switching  
Closed  
Freerun  
Holdover  
Frequency  
unlocked  
Frequency  
locked  
Phase unlocked  
Phase locked  
00  
00  
00  
Reserved  
History  
updated  
Frequency  
unclamped  
Frequency  
clamped  
Phase slew  
unlimited  
Phase slew  
limited  
Reserved  
Reserved  
REFB  
validated  
REFB  
fault  
cleared  
REFB  
fault  
Reserved  
REFA  
validated  
REFA fault  
cleared  
REFA fault  
0x020F  
REFD  
validated  
REFD  
fault  
REFD fault  
Reserved  
REFC  
validated  
REFC fault  
cleared  
REFC fault  
00  
cleared  
0x0210  
0x0211  
0x0300  
0x0301  
0x0302  
0x0303  
0x0304  
Watchdog  
Timer 1  
Watchdog timer (ms), Bits[7:0]  
Watchdog timer (ms), Bits[15:8]  
00  
00  
11  
15  
64  
1B  
10  
Freerun  
frequency TW  
30-bit free run frequency tuning word[7:0]  
30-bit free run frequency tuning word[15:8]  
30-bit free run frequency tuning word[23:16]  
30-bit free run frequency tuning word[29:24]  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Digital  
oscillator  
control  
DCO  
4-level  
output  
Reset SDM  
Reserved  
(must be 1b)  
0x0305  
0x0306  
0x0307  
0x0308  
0x0309  
0x030A  
0x030B  
0x030C  
0x030D  
0x030E  
0x030F  
0x0310  
0x0311  
0x0312  
0x0313  
0x0314  
0x0315  
0x0316  
Reserved  
00  
51  
B8  
02  
3E  
0A  
0B  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
0A  
00  
00  
DPLL  
frequency  
clamp  
Lower limit of pull-in range[7:0]  
Lower limit of pull-in range[15:8]  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Lower limit of pull-in range[19:16]  
Upper limit of pull-in range[7:0]  
Upper limit of pull-in range[15:8]  
Upper limit of pull-in range[19:16]  
Closed-loop  
phase lock  
offset  
Fixed phase lock offset (signed; ps), Bits[7:0]  
Fixed phase lock offset (signed; ps), Bits[15:8]  
Fixed phase lock offset (signed; ps), Bits[23:16]  
Fixed phase lock offset (signed; ps), Bits[29:24]  
[
0.5 ms]  
Reserved  
Incremental phase lock offset step size (ps/step), Bits[7:0] (up to 65.5 ns/step)  
Incremental phase lock offset step size (ps/step), Bits[15:8] (up to 65.5 ns/step)  
Phase slew rate limit (μs/sec), Bits[7:0] (315 μs/sec up to 65.536 ms/sec)  
Phase slew rate limit (μs/sec), Bits[15:8] (315 μs/sec up to 65.536 ms/sec)  
History accumulation timer (ms), Bits[7:0] (up to 65 seconds)  
Phase slew  
rate limit  
Holdover  
history  
History accumulation timer (ms), Bits[15:8] (up to 65 seconds)  
History mode  
Reserved  
Single  
sample  
fallback  
Persistent  
history  
Incremental average  
0x0317  
0x0318  
0x0319  
0x031A  
0x031B  
0x031C  
0x031D  
0x031E  
0x031F  
0x0320  
0x0321  
0x0322  
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
Base Loop  
Filter A  
coefficient set  
(high phase  
margin)  
HPM Alpha-0[7:0]  
8C  
AD  
4C  
F5  
HPM Alpha-0[15:8]  
HPM Alpha-1[6:0]  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
HPM Beta-0[7:0]  
HPM Beta-0[15:8]  
CB  
73  
24  
D8  
59  
D2  
8D  
5A  
HPM Beta-1[6:0]  
HPM Gamma-0[7:0]  
HPM Gamma-0[15:8]  
HPM Gamma-1[6:0]  
HPM Delta-0[7:0]  
HPM Delta-0[15:8]  
HPM Delta-1[6:0]  
Rev. A | Page 63 of 104  
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
Reg  
Addr  
(Hex)  
Opt  
L
Name  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Def  
24  
8C  
49  
55  
C9  
7B  
9C  
FA  
55  
EA  
E2  
57  
0x0323  
0x0324  
0x0325  
0x0326  
0x0327  
0x0328  
0x0329  
0x032A  
0x032B  
0x032C  
0x032D  
0x032E  
Base loop  
Filter A  
coefficient set  
(normal phase  
margin of 70º)  
NPM Alpha-0[7:0]  
NPM Alpha-0[15:8]  
L
L
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
NPM Alpha-1[6:0]  
NPM Beta-0[7:0]  
NPM Beta-0[15:8]  
NPM Beta-1[6:0]  
L
L
L
L
NPM Gamma-0[7:0]  
NPM Gamma-0[15:8]  
L
L
NPM Gamma-1[6:0]  
L
NPM Delta-0[7:0]  
NPM Delta-0[15:8]  
L
L
NPM Delta-1[6:0]  
Output PLL (APLL)  
0x0400  
APLL charge  
pump  
Output PLL (APLL) charge pump[7:0]  
81  
0x0401  
0x0402  
0x0403  
0x0404  
APLL N divider  
Output PLL (APLL) feedback N divider[7:0]  
Reserved  
14  
00  
07  
00  
APLL loop  
filter control  
APLL loop filter control[7:0]  
Reserved  
Bypass  
internal Rzero  
0x0405  
APLL VCO  
control  
Reserved (default: 0x2)  
APLL locked  
controlled  
Reserved  
Manual APLL  
VCO (not  
20  
sync disable  
autoclearing)  
0x0406  
0x0407  
0x0408  
Reserved  
00  
44  
02  
RF divider  
RF Divider 2[3:0]  
Reserved  
RF Divider 1[3:0]  
RF divider  
startup  
mode  
Reserved  
PD RF Divider 2  
PD RF Divider 1  
Output Clock Distribution  
0x0500  
Distribution  
output sync  
Mask  
Channel 3  
sync  
Mask  
Channel 2  
sync  
Mask  
Channel 1  
sync  
Mask  
Channel 0  
sync  
Reserved  
Sync  
source  
selection  
OUT0 polarity[1:0]  
Automatic sync mode  
02  
10  
0x0501  
Channel 0  
Enable 3.3 V  
CMOS driver  
OUT0 format[2:0]  
OUT0 drive  
strength  
Enable OUT0  
0x0502  
0x0503  
Channel 0 (M0) division ratio[7:0]  
Channel 0 PD Select RF  
Divider 2  
Channel 0 divider phase[5:0]  
00  
00  
Reserved  
Channel 0 (M0) division ratio[9:8]  
0x0504  
0x0505  
Reserved  
00  
10  
Channel 1  
Channel 2  
Channel 3  
Reserved  
Reserved  
OUT1 format[2:0]  
OUT2 format[2:0]  
OUT1 polarity[1:0]  
OUT1 drive  
strength  
Enable OUT1  
Enable OUT2  
0x0506  
OUT2 polarity[1:0]  
OUT2 drive  
strength  
10  
0x0507  
0x0508  
Channel 1 (M1) division ratio[7:0]  
Channel 1 PD  
03  
00  
Reserved  
Select RF  
Divider 2  
Channel 1 (M1) division ratio[9:8]  
0x0509  
0x050A  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Channel 1 divider phase[5:0]  
00  
10  
OUT3 format[2:0]  
OUT4 format[2:0]  
OUT3 polarity[1:0]  
OUT3 drive  
strength  
Enable OUT3  
Enable OUT4  
0x050B  
Reserved  
OUT4 polarity[1:0]  
OUT4 drive  
strength  
10  
0x050C  
0x050D  
Channel 2 (M2) division ratio[7:0]  
Channel 2 PD  
00  
00  
Reserved  
Select RF  
Divider 2  
Channel 2 (M2) division ratio[9:8]  
0x050E  
0x050F  
Reserved  
Channel 2 divider phase[5:0]  
OUT5 polarity[1:0] OUT5 drive  
strength  
00  
10  
Enable 3.3 V  
CMOS driver  
OUT5 format[2:0]  
Enable OUT5  
0x0510  
0x0511  
Channel 3, Divider 1 (M3) division ratio[7:0]  
Reserved  
03  
00  
Channel 3, Divider 1 (M3)  
division ratio[9:8]  
0x0512  
0x0513  
Channel 3, Divider 2 (M3b) division ratio[7:0]  
00  
00  
Reserved  
Enable  
Channnel 3  
PD  
Select RF  
Divider 2  
Channel 3, Divider 2 (M3b)  
division ratio[9:8]  
Channel 3  
doubler  
0x0514  
0x0515  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Channel 3, Divider 1 phase[5:0]  
Channel 3, Divider 2 phase[5:0]  
00  
00  
Rev. A | Page 64 of 104  
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
Reg  
Addr  
(Hex)  
Opt  
Name  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Def  
Reference Inputs  
0x0600  
Reference  
power-down  
Reserved  
Reference power-down[3:0]  
00  
00  
0x0601  
Reference  
logic type  
REFD logic type[1:0]  
REFD priority[1:0]  
REFC logic type[1:0]  
REFC priority[1:0]  
REFB logic type[1:0]  
REFB priority[1:0]  
REFA logic type[1:0]  
REFA priority[1:0]  
0x0602  
0x0603  
Reference  
priority  
00  
00  
Reserved  
Frame Synchronization Mode  
0x0640  
0x0641  
En frame sync  
Reserved  
Enable Fsync  
00  
Frame sync  
options  
Reserved  
Validate  
Fsync ref  
Fsync one  
shot  
Fsync  
arm  
Arm soft Fsync  
00  
method  
Profile A (for REFA)  
0x0700  
0x0701  
0x0702  
0x0703  
0x0704  
0x0705  
0x0706  
0x0707  
0x0708  
0x0709  
0x070A  
0x070B  
0x070C  
0x070D  
0x070E  
L
Reference  
period (up to  
1.1 ms)  
Nominal reference period (fs), Bits[7:0] (default: 51.44 ns =1/(19.44 MHz) for default system clock setting)  
Nominal period (fs), Bits[15:8]  
C9  
EA  
10  
03  
00  
14  
00  
00  
0A  
00  
00  
0A  
00  
00  
00  
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
Nominal period (fs), Bits[23:16]  
Nominal period (fs), Bits[31:24]  
Nominal period (fs), Bits[39:32]  
Frequency  
tolerance  
Inner tolerance (1 ppm), Bits[7:0] (for reference invalid to valid; 50% down to 1 ppm) (default: 5%)  
Inner tolerance (1 ppm), Bits[15:8] (for reference invalid to valid; 50% down to 1 ppm)  
Reserved  
Inner tolerance, Bits[19:16]  
Outer tolerance (1 ppm), Bits[7:0] (for reference valid to invalid; 50% down to 1 ppm) (default: 10%)  
Outer tolerance (1 ppm), Bits[15:8] (for reference valid to invalid; 50% down to 1 ppm)  
Reserved  
Outer tolerance, Bits[19:16]  
Validation timer (ms), Bits[7:0] (up to 65.5 seconds)  
Validation  
Validation timer (ms), Bits[15:8] (up to 65.5 seconds)  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Select base  
loop filter  
Sel high PM  
base loop  
filter  
0x070F  
0x0710  
0x0711  
L
L
L
DPLL loop BW  
Digital PLL loop BW scaling factor[7:0] (default: 0x01F4 = 50 Hz)  
Digital PLL loop BW scaling factor[15:8]  
Reserved  
F4  
01  
00  
BW scaling  
factor[16]  
0x0712  
0x0713  
0x0714  
L
L
L
DPLL  
R divider  
(20 bits)  
R divider[7:0]  
R divider[15:8]  
C5  
00  
00  
Reserved  
Enable REFA  
divide-by-2  
R divider[19:16]  
0x0715  
0x0716  
0x0717  
DPLL  
N divider  
(17 bits)  
Digital PLL feedback divider—Integer Part N1[7:0]  
Digital PLL feedback divider—Integer Part N1[15:8]  
Reserved  
6B  
07  
00  
Digital PLL  
feedback  
divider—  
Integer Part  
N1[16]  
0x0718  
DPLL  
Digital PLL fractional feedback divider—FRAC1[7:0]  
04  
fractional  
feedback  
divider  
0x0719  
0x071A  
0x071B  
Digital PLL fractional feedback divider—FRAC1[15:8]  
Digital PLL fractional feedback divider—FRAC1[23:16]  
Digital PLL feedback divider modulus—MOD1[7:0]  
00  
00  
05  
(24 bits)  
DPLL  
fractional  
feedback  
divider  
modulus  
(24 bits)  
0x071C  
0x071D  
Digital PLL feedback divider modulus—MOD1[15:8]  
Digital PLL feedback divider modulus—MOD1[23:16]  
00  
00  
0x071E  
0x071F  
0x0720  
0x0721  
0x0722  
0x0723  
0x0724  
0x0725  
0x0726  
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
Lock detectors  
Phase lock threshold (ps), Bits[7:0]  
Phase lock threshold (ps), Bits[15:8]  
Phase lock fill rate[7:0]  
BC  
02  
0A  
0A  
BC  
02  
00  
0A  
0A  
Phase lock drain rate[7:0]  
Frequency lock threshold[7:0]  
Frequency lock threshold[15:8]  
Frequency lock threshold[23:16]  
Frequency lock fill rate[7:0]  
Frequency lock drain rate[7:0]  
Rev. A | Page 65 of 104  
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
Reg  
Addr  
(Hex)  
Opt  
Name  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Def  
Profile B (for REFB)  
0x0740  
0x0741  
0x0742  
0x0743  
0x0744  
0x0745  
0x0746  
0x0747  
0x0748  
0x0749  
0x074A  
0x074B  
0x074C  
0x074D  
0x074E  
L
Reference  
period (up to  
1.1 ms)  
Nominal period (fs), Bits[7:0] (default: 125 μs = 1/(8 kHz) for default system clock setting)  
Nominal period (fs), Bits[15:8]  
00  
A2  
94  
1A  
1D  
14  
00  
00  
0A  
00  
00  
0A  
00  
00  
00  
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
Nominal period (fs), Bits[23:16]  
Nominal period (fs), Bits[31:24]  
Nominal period (fs), Bits[39:32]  
Frequency  
tolerance  
Inner tolerance (1 ppm), Bits[7:0] (for reference invalid to valid; 50% down to 1 ppm) (default: 5%)  
Inner tolerance (1 ppm), Bits[15:8] (for reference invalid to valid; 50% down to 1 ppm)  
Reserved  
Inner tolerance, Bits[19:16]  
Outer tolerance (1 ppm), Bits[7:0] (for reference valid to invalid; 50% down to 1 ppm] (default: 10%)  
Outer tolerance (1 ppm), Bits[15:8] (for reference valid to invalid; 50% down to 1 ppm)  
Reserved  
Outer tolerance, Bits[19:16]  
Validation timer (ms), Bits[7:0] (up to 65.5 seconds)  
Validation  
Validation timer (ms), Bits[15:8] (up to 65.5 seconds)  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Select base  
loop filter  
Sel high PM  
base loop  
filter  
0x074F  
0x0750  
0x0751  
L
L
L
DPLL loop BW  
F4  
01  
00  
Digital PLL loop BW scaling factor[7:0] (default: 0x01F4 = 50 Hz)  
Digital PLL loop BW scaling factor[15:8]  
Reserved  
BW scaling  
factor[16]  
0x0752  
0x0753  
0x0754  
L
L
L
DPLL  
R divider  
(20 bits)  
R divider[7:0]  
R divider[15:8]  
00  
00  
00  
Reserved  
Enable REFB  
divide-by-2  
R divider[19:16]  
0x0755  
0x0756  
0x0757  
DPLL  
N divider  
(17 bits)  
Digital PLL feedback divider—Integer Part N1[7:0]  
Digital PLL feedback divider—Integer Part N1[15:8]  
Reserved  
1F  
5B  
00  
Digital PLL  
feedback  
divider—  
Integer Part  
N1[16]  
0x0758  
0x0759  
0x075A  
DPLL  
Digital PLL fractional feedback divider—FRAC1[7:0]  
Digital PLL fractional feedback divider—FRAC1[15:8]  
Digital PLL fractional feedback divider—FRAC1[23:16]  
00  
00  
00  
fractional  
feedback  
divider  
(24 bits)  
0x075B  
0x075C  
DPLL  
Digital PLL feedback divider modulus—MOD1[7:0]  
Digital PLL feedback divider modulus—MOD1[15:8]  
01  
00  
fractional  
feedback  
divider  
modulus  
(24 bits)  
0x075D  
Digital PLL feedback divider modulus—MOD1[23:16]  
00  
0x075E  
0x075F  
0x0760  
0x0761  
0x0762  
0x0763  
0x0764  
0x0765  
0x0766  
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
Lock detectors  
Phase lock threshold (ps), Bits[7:0]  
Phase lock threshold(ps), Bits[15:8]  
Phase lock fill rate[7:0]  
BC  
02  
0A  
0A  
BC  
02  
00  
0A  
0A  
Phase lock drain rate[7:0]  
Frequency lock threshold[7:0]  
Frequency lock threshold[15:8]  
Frequency lock threshold[23:16]  
Frequency lock fill rate[7:0]  
Frequency lock drain rate[7:0]  
Rev. A | Page 66 of 104  
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
Reg  
Addr  
(Hex)  
Opt  
Name  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Def  
Profile C (for REFC)  
0x0780  
0x0781  
0x0782  
0x0783  
0x0784  
0x0785  
0x0786  
0x0787  
0x0788  
0x0789  
0x078A  
0x078B  
0x078C  
0x078D  
0x078E  
L
Reference  
period (up to  
1.1 ms)  
C9  
EA  
10  
03  
00  
14  
00  
00  
0A  
00  
00  
0A  
00  
00  
Nominal period (fs), Bits[7:0] (default: 125 μs = 1/(8 kHz) for default system clock setting)  
Nominal period (fs), Bits[15:8]  
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
Nominal period (fs), Bits[23:16]  
Nominal period (fs), Bits[31:24]  
Nominal period (fs), Bits[39:32]  
Frequency  
tolerance  
Inner tolerance (1 ppm), Bits[7:0] (for reference invalid to valid; 50% down to 1 ppm) (default: 5%)  
Inner tolerance (1 ppm), Bits[15:8] (for reference invalid to valid; 50% down to 1 ppm)  
Reserved  
Inner tolerance, Bits[19:16]  
Outer tolerance (1 ppm), Bits[7:0] (for reference valid to invalid; 50% down to 1 ppm] (default: 10%)  
Outer tolerance (1 ppm), Bits[15:8] (for reference valid to invalid; 50% down to 1 ppm)  
Reserved  
Outer tolerance, Bits[19:16]  
Validation timer (ms), Bits[7:0] (up to 65.5 seconds)  
Validation  
Validation timer (ms), Bits[15:8] (up to 65.5 seconds)  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Select base  
loop filter  
00  
Sel high PM  
base loop filt  
0x078F  
0x0790  
0x0791  
L
L
L
DPLL loop BW  
Digital PLL loop BW scaling factor[7:0] (default: 0x01F4 = 50 Hz)  
Digital PLL loop BW scaling factor[15:8]  
Reserved  
F4  
01  
00  
BW scaling  
factor[16]  
0x0792  
0x0793  
0x0794  
L
L
L
DPLL  
R divider  
(20 bits)  
R divider[7:0]  
R divider[15:8]  
C5  
00  
00  
Reserved  
Enable REFC  
divide-by-2  
R divider[19:16]  
0x0795  
0x0796  
0x0797  
DPLL  
N divider  
(17 bits)  
Digital PLL feedback divider—Integer Part N1[7:0]  
Digital PLL feedback divider—Integer Part N1[15:8]  
Reserved  
6B  
07  
00  
Digital PLL  
feedback  
divider—  
Integer Part  
N1[16]  
0x0798  
0x0799  
0x079A  
DPLL  
Digital PLL fractional feedback divider—FRAC1[7:0]  
Digital PLL fractional feedback divider—FRAC1[15:8]  
Digital PLL fractional feedback divider—FRAC1[23:16]  
04  
00  
00  
fractional  
feedback  
divider  
(24 bits)  
0x079B  
0x079C  
0x079D  
DPLL  
Digital PLL feedback divider modulus—MOD1[7:0]  
Digital PLL feedback divider modulus—MOD1[15:8]  
Digital PLL feedback divider modulus—MOD1[23:16]  
05  
00  
00  
fractional  
feedback  
divider  
modulus  
(24 bits)  
0x079E  
0x079F  
0x07A0  
0x07A1  
0x07A2  
0x07A3  
0x07A4  
0x07A5  
0x07A6  
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
Lock detectors  
Phase lock threshold (ps), Bits[7:0]  
Phase lock threshold (ps), Bits[15:8]  
Phase lock fill rate[7:0]  
BC  
02  
0A  
0A  
BC  
02  
00  
0A  
0A  
Phase lock drain rate[7:0]  
Frequency lock threshold[7:0]  
Frequency lock threshold[15:8]  
Frequency lock threshold[23:16]  
Frequency lock fill rate[7:0]  
Frequency lock drain rate[7:0]  
Rev. A | Page 67 of 104  
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
Reg  
Addr  
(Hex)  
Opt  
Name  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Def  
DPLL Profile D (for REFD)  
0x07C0  
0x07C1  
0x07C2  
0x07C3  
0x07C4  
0x07C5  
0x07C6  
0x07C7  
0x07C8  
0x07C9  
0x07CA  
0x07CB  
0x07CC  
0x07CD  
0x07CE  
L
Reference  
period (up to  
1.1 ms)  
00  
A2  
94  
1A  
1D  
14  
00  
00  
0A  
00  
00  
0A  
00  
00  
00  
Nominal reference period (fs), Bits[7:0] (default: 51.44 ns =1/(19.44 MHz) for default system clock setting)  
Nominal period (fs), Bits[15:8]  
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
Nominal period (fs), Bits[23:16]  
Nominal period (fs), Bits[31:24]  
Nominal period (fs), Bits[39:32]  
Tolerance  
Validation  
Inner tolerance (1 ppm), Bits[7:0] (for reference invalid to valid; 50% down to 1 ppm) (default: 5%)  
Inner tolerance (1 ppm), Bits[15:8] (for reference invalid to valid; 50% down to 1 ppm)  
Reserved  
Inner tolerance, Bits[19:16]  
Outer tolerance (1 ppm), Bits[7:0] (for reference valid to invalid; 50% down to 1 ppm) (default: 10%)  
Outer tolerance (1 ppm), Bits[15:8] (for reference valid to invalid; 50% down to 1 ppm)  
Reserved  
Outer tolerance, Bits[19:16]  
Validation timer (ms), Bits[7:0] (up to 65.5 seconds)  
Validation timer (ms), Bits[15:8] (up to 65.5 seconds]  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Select base  
loop filter  
Sel high PM  
base loop  
filter  
0x07CF  
0x07D0  
0x07D1  
L
L
L
DPLL loop BW  
Digital PLL loop BW scaling factor[7:0] (default: 0x01F4 = 50 Hz)  
Digital PLL loop bandwidth BW scaling factor[15:8]  
Reserved  
F4  
01  
00  
BW scaling  
factor[16]  
0x07D2  
0x07D3  
0x07D4  
L
L
L
DPLL  
R divider  
(20 bits)  
R divider[7:0]  
R divider[15:8]  
00  
00  
00  
Reserved  
Enable  
REFD  
R divider[19:16]  
divide-by-2  
0x07D5  
0x07D6  
0x07D7  
DPLL  
N divider  
(17 bits)  
Digital PLL feedback divider—Integer Part N1[7:0]  
Digital PLL feedback divider—Integer Part N1[15:8]  
Reserved  
1F  
5B  
00  
Digital PLL  
feedback  
divider—  
Integer Part  
N1[16]  
0x07D8  
0x07D9  
0x07DA  
DPLL  
Digital PLL fractional feedback divider—FRAC1[7:0]  
Digital PLL fractional feedback divider—FRAC1[15:8]  
Digital PLL fractional feedback divider—FRAC1[23:16]  
00  
00  
00  
fractional  
feedback  
divider  
(24 bits)  
0x07DB  
0x07DC  
0x07DD  
DPLL  
Digital PLL feedback divider modulus—MOD1[7:0]  
Digital PLL feedback divider modulus—MOD1[15:8]  
Digital PLL feedback divider modulus—MOD1[23:16]  
01  
00  
00  
fractional  
feedback  
divider  
modulus  
(24 bits)  
0x07DE  
0x07DF  
0x07E0  
0x07E1  
0x07E2  
0x07E3  
0x07E4  
0x07E5  
0x07E6  
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
Lock detectors  
Phase lock threshold (ps), Bits[7:0]  
Phase lock threshold(ps), Bits[15:8]  
Phase lock fill rate[7:0]  
BC  
02  
0A  
0A  
BC  
02  
00  
0A  
0A  
Phase lock drain rate[7:0]  
Frequency lock threshold[7:0]  
Frequency lock threshold[15:8]  
Frequency lock threshold[23:16]  
Frequency lock fill rate[7:0]  
Frequency lock drain rate[7:0]  
Rev. A | Page 68 of 104  
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
Reg  
Addr  
(Hex)  
Opt  
Name  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Def  
Operational Controls  
0x0A00  
0x0A01  
Power-down  
Soft reset  
exclude  
regmap  
DCO PD  
SYSCLK  
PD  
Ref input  
PD  
TDC PD  
APLL PD  
Clock dist PD  
Full PD  
00  
Loop mode  
Cal/sync  
Reserved  
User  
holdover  
User  
freerun  
REF switchover mode[2:0]  
00  
User ref in manual  
switchover mode  
0x0A02  
0x0A03  
0x0A04  
0x0A05  
Reserved  
Soft sync  
clock dist  
Reserved  
00  
00  
00  
00  
A
A
A
Clear/reset  
functions  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Clear LF  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Clear CCI  
Reserved  
Clear auto  
sync  
Clear TW  
history  
Clear all IRQs  
Clear watchdog  
IRQ clearing  
SYSCLK  
unlocked  
SYSCLK  
locked  
APLL  
unlocked  
APLL  
locked  
APLL cal ended  
EEPROM fault  
APLL cal  
started  
Pin  
program  
end  
Sync clock  
dist  
Watchdog  
timer  
EEPROM  
complete  
0x0A06  
0x0A07  
0x0A08  
0x0A09  
A
A
A
A
Switching  
Closed  
Freerun  
Holdover  
Frequency  
unlocked  
Frequency  
locked  
Phase  
unlocked  
Phase  
locked  
00  
00  
00  
00  
Reserved  
History  
updated  
Frequency  
unclamped  
Frequency  
clamped  
Phase slew  
unlimited  
Phase slew  
limited  
Reserved  
Reserved  
REFB  
validated  
REFB fault  
cleared  
REFB fault  
Reserved  
REFA  
validated  
REFA fault  
cleared  
REFA fault  
REFD  
validated  
REFD  
fault  
REFD fault  
Reserved  
REFC  
validated  
REFC fault  
cleared  
REFC fault  
cleared  
0x0A0A  
0x0A0B  
0x0A0C  
0x0A0D  
A
A
Increment  
phase offset  
Reserved  
Reset  
phase  
offset  
Decrement  
phase offset  
Increment  
phase offset  
00  
00  
00  
00  
Manual  
reference  
validation  
Reserved  
Force  
Timeout D  
Force  
Timeout C  
Force  
Timeout B  
Force  
Timeout A  
Manual  
reference  
invalidation  
Reserved  
Reserved  
REF Mon  
Override D  
REF Mon  
Override C  
REF Mon  
Override B  
REF Mon  
Override A  
Static  
reference  
validation  
REF Mon  
Bypass D  
REF Mon  
Bypass C  
REF Mon  
Bypass B  
REF Mon  
Bypass A  
Quick In-Out Frequency Soft Pin Configuration  
0x0C00  
L, E  
Enable  
Soft Pin  
Section 1  
Reserved  
En Soft Pin  
Section 1  
00  
0x0C01  
0x0C02  
0x0C03  
L, E  
L, E  
L, E  
Soft Pin  
Section 1  
Output frequency selection[3:0]  
Input frequency selection[3:0]  
00  
00  
00  
Reserved  
SYSCLK PLL REF selection[1:0]  
Enable  
Soft Pin  
Section 2  
Reserved  
En Soft Pin  
Section 2  
0x0C04  
0x0C05  
0x0C06  
L, E  
L, E  
L, E  
Soft Pin  
Section 2  
REFD frequency scale[1:0]  
REFC frequency  
scale[1:0]  
REFB frequency scale[1:0]  
REFA frequency scale[1:0]  
00  
00  
00  
Channel 3 output frequency  
scale[1:0]  
Channel 2 output  
frequency scale[1:0]  
Channel 1 output frequency  
scale[1:0]  
Channel 0 output frequency  
scale[1:0]  
Reserved  
Sel high  
PM base  
loop filter  
DPLL BW[1:0]  
REF tolerance[1:0]  
0x0C07  
0x0C08  
L, A,  
E
Reserved  
Soft pin start  
transfer  
00  
00  
L, E  
Reserved  
Soft pin reset  
Rev. A | Page 69 of 104  
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
Reg  
Addr  
(Hex)  
Opt  
Name  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Def  
Read-Only Status (Accessible During EEPROM Transactions)  
0x0D00  
0x0D01  
R, L  
R, L  
EEPROM  
Reserved  
Pin program  
ROM load  
process  
Fault  
detected  
Load in  
progress  
Save in  
progress  
N/A  
SYSCLK and  
PLL status  
Reserved  
DPLL_  
APLL_  
Lock  
All PLLs  
locked  
APLL VCO  
status  
APLL cal  
in progress  
APLL lock  
SYSCLK stable  
APLL cal ended  
SYSCLK  
lock detect  
N/A  
0x0D02  
0x0D03  
R, L  
R, L  
IRQ monitor  
events  
Reserved  
SYSCLK  
unlocked  
SYSCLK  
locked  
APLL  
unlocked  
APLL  
lock detect  
APLL cal  
started  
N/A  
N/A  
Reserved  
Pin  
program  
end  
Output dist  
sync  
Watchdog  
timer  
EEPROM  
fault  
EEPROM  
complete  
0x0D04  
0x0D05  
0x0D06  
0x0D07  
R, L  
R, L  
R, L  
R, L  
Switching  
Closed  
Freerun  
Holdover  
Frequency  
unlocked  
Frequency  
locked  
Phase  
unlocked  
Phase  
locked  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Reserved  
History  
updated  
Frequency  
unclamped  
Frequency  
clamped  
Phase slew  
unlimited  
Phase slew  
limited  
Reserved  
Reserved  
REFB  
validated  
REFB fault  
cleared  
REFB fault  
Reserved  
REFA  
validated  
REFA fault  
cleared  
REFA fault  
REFD  
validated  
REFD  
fault  
REFD  
fault  
Reserved  
REFC  
validated  
REFC  
fault cleared  
REFC  
fault  
cleared  
0x0D08  
0x0D09  
R
R
DPLL  
Reserved  
Offset slew  
limiting  
Frequency  
lock  
Phase lock  
Loop  
switching  
Holdover  
Active  
Freerun  
N/A  
N/A  
Reserved  
Frequency  
clamped  
History  
available  
Reserved  
Active  
reference  
priority  
Current active reference  
0x0D0A  
0x0D0B  
R
R
Reserved  
N/A  
N/A  
REFA/REFB  
REFC/REFD  
B valid  
D valid  
B fault  
D fault  
B fast  
D fast  
B slow  
D slow  
A valid  
C valid  
A fault  
C fault  
A fast  
C fast  
A slow  
C slow  
0x0D0C  
R
N/A  
0x0D0D  
0x0D0E  
0x0D0F  
0x0D10  
0x0D11  
0x0D12  
0x0D13  
0x0D14  
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Holdover  
history  
Tuning word readback[31:0]  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Lock detector  
phase tub  
Phase tub[7:0]  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Phase tub[11:8]  
Lock detector  
frequency tub  
Frequency tub[7:0]  
Frequency tub[11:8]  
Nonvolatile Memory (EEPROM) Control  
0x0E00  
E
Write protect  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Write enable  
00  
0x0E01  
0x0E02  
E
Condition  
Save  
Reserved  
Conditional value[3:0]  
00  
00  
A,E  
Save to  
EEPROM  
0x0E03  
A,E  
Load  
Reserved  
Load from  
EEPROM  
00  
Rev. A | Page 70 of 104  
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
Reg  
Addr  
(Hex)  
Opt  
Name  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Def  
EEPROM Storage Sequence  
0x0E10  
0x0E11  
0x0E12  
0x0E13  
0x0E14  
0x0E15  
0x0E16  
0x0E17  
0x0E18  
0x0E19  
0x0E1A  
0x0E1B  
0x0E1C  
0x0E1D  
0x0E1E  
0x0E1F  
0x0E20  
0x0E21  
0x0E22  
0x0E23  
0x0E24  
0x0E25  
0x0E26  
0x0E27  
0x0E28  
0x0E29  
0x0E2A  
0x0E2B  
0x0E2C  
0x0E2D  
0x0E2E  
0x0E2F  
0x0E30  
0x0E31  
0x0E32  
0x0E33  
0x0E34  
0x0E35  
0x0E36  
0x0E37  
0x0E38  
0x0E39  
0x0E3A  
0x0E3B  
0x0E3C  
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
EEPROM ID  
Data: two bytes  
Address: 0x0006  
01  
00  
06  
08  
01  
00  
80  
11  
02  
00  
2E  
03  
00  
08  
04  
00  
15  
05  
00  
80  
03  
06  
00  
01  
06  
40  
26  
07  
00  
26  
07  
40  
26  
07  
80  
26  
07  
C0  
80  
0D  
0A  
00  
A0  
80  
FF  
00  
System  
clock  
Data: nine bytes  
Address: 0x0100  
I/O update  
General  
Action: I/O update  
Data: 18 bytes  
Address: 0x0200  
DPLL  
Data: 47 bytes  
Address: 0x0300  
APLL  
Data: nine bytes  
Address: 0x0400  
Clock dist  
I/O update  
Data: 22 bytes  
Address: 0x0500  
Action: I/O update  
Data: four bytes  
Address: 0x0600  
Reference  
inputs  
Data: two bytes  
Address: 0x0640  
Profile REFA  
Profile REFB  
Profile REFC  
Profile REFD  
I/O update  
Data: 39 bytes  
Address: 0x0700  
Data: 39 bytes  
Address: 0x0740  
Data: 39 bytes  
Address: 0x0780  
Data: 39 bytes  
Address: 0x07C0  
Action: I/O update  
Data: 14 bytes  
Operational  
controls  
Address: 0x0A00  
Calibrate APLL  
I/O update  
End of data  
Unused  
Action: calibrate output PLL  
Action: I/O update  
Action: End of data  
Unused  
0x0E3D  
to  
(available for additional EEPROM instructions)  
0xE45  
Rev. A | Page 71 of 104  
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
REGISTER MAP BIT DESCRIPTIONS  
SERIAL PORT CONFIGURATION (REGISTER 0x0000 TO REGISTER 0x0005)  
Table 36. Serial Configuration (Note that the contents of Register 0x0000 are not stored to the EEPROM.)  
Address  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0000  
7
SDO enable  
Enables SPI port SDO pin.  
1 = 4-wire (SDO pin enabled).  
0 (default) = 3-wire.  
6
LSB first/increment  
address  
Bit order for SPI port.  
1 = least significant bit and byte first.  
Register addresses are automatically incremented in multibyte transfers.  
0 (default) = most significant bit and byte first.  
Register addresses are automatically decremented in multibyte transfers.  
5
Soft reset  
Device reset (invokes an EEPROM download or pin program ROM download if EEPROM or  
pin program is enabled. See the EEPROM and Pin Configuration and Function Descriptions  
sections for details.  
[4:0] Reserved  
Table 37. Readback Control  
Reserved.  
Address  
Bits  
[7:1] Reserved  
Read buffer register  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0004  
Reserved.  
0
For buffered registers, serial port readback reads from actual (active) registers instead of the  
buffer.  
1 = reads buffered values that take effect on next assertion of I/O update.  
0 (default) = reads values currently applied to the device’s internal logic.  
Table 38. Soft I/O Update  
Address  
Bits  
[7:1] Reserved  
I/O update  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0005  
Reserved.  
0
Writing a 1 to this bit transfers the data in the serial I/O buffer registers to the device’s  
internal control registers. Unless a register is marked as live (as indicated by an L in the Opt  
column of the register map), the user must write to this bit before any register settings can  
take effect and before a read-only register can be updated with the most current value.  
This is an autoclearing bit.  
Table 39. User Scratch Pad  
Address  
0x0006  
0x0007  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
[7:0] User scratch pad[7:0]  
[7:0] User scratch pad[15:8]  
User programmable EEPROM ID registers. These registers enable users to write a unique  
code of their choosing to keep track of revisions to the EEPROM register loading. It has no  
effect on part operation.  
0 = default.  
SILICON REVISION (REGISTER 0x000A)  
Table 40. Silicon Revision  
Address  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x000A  
[7:0] Silicon revision  
This read-only register identifies the revision level of the AD9558.  
CLOCK PART SERIAL ID (REGISTER 0x000C TO REGISTER 0x000D)  
Table 41. Clock Part Family ID  
Address  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x000C  
[7:0] Clock part family ID[7:0]  
This read-only register (along with Register 0x000D) uniquely identifies an AD9557 or  
AD9558. No other part in the ADI AD95xx family has a value of 0x0001 in these two registers.  
Default: 0x01 for the AD9557 and AD9558.  
0x000D  
[7:0] Clock part family ID[15:8] This register is a continuation of Register 0x000C.  
Default: 0x00 for the AD9557 and AD9558.  
Rev. A | Page 72 of 104  
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
SYSTEM CLOCK (REGISTER 0x0100 TO REGISTER 0x0108)  
Table 42. System Clock PLL Feedback Divider (N3 Divider)  
Address  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0100  
[7:0] SYSCLK N3 divider  
System clock PLL feedback divider value: 4 ≤ N3 ≤ 255 (default: 0x08).  
Table 43. SYSCLK Configuration  
Address  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0101  
[7:5] Reserved  
Reserved.  
4
3
Load from ROM  
(reserved)  
This reserved bit has no function.  
0 (default) = power-on default and ROM not loaded.  
1 = ROM values are loaded into the register space.  
SYSCLK XTAL enable  
Enables the crystal maintaining amplifier for the system clock input.  
1 (default) = crystal mode (crystal maintaining amplifier enabled).  
0 = external XO or other system clock source.  
[2:1] SYSCLK P divider  
System clock input divider.  
00 (default) = 1.  
01 = 2.  
10 = 4.  
11 = 8.  
0
SYSCLK doubler enable  
Enable clock doubler on system clock input to reduce noise.  
0 = disable.  
1 (default) = enable.  
Table 44. Nominal System Clock Period1  
Address  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0103  
[7:0] Nominal system clock period (fs)  
System clock period, Bits[7:0].  
Default: 0x0E.  
0x0104  
0x0105  
[7:0]  
System clock period, Bits[15:8].  
Default: 0x67.  
[7:5] Reserved  
Reserved.  
[4:0] Nominal system clock period (fs)  
System clock period, Bits[20:16].  
Default: 0x13.  
1 Note that the default setting for system clock period is 1.271566 ns, which is the period of 786.432 MHz (= 49.152 MHz × 16).  
Table 45. System Clock Stability Period  
Address  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0106  
[7:0] System clock stability period (ms) System clock period, Bits[7:0].  
Default: 0x32 (0x000032 = 50 ms).  
0x0107  
0x0108  
[7:0]  
System clock period, Bits[15:8].  
Default: 0x00.  
[7:5] Reserved  
Reserved.  
4
Reset SYSCLK stability timer  
This autoclearing bit resets the system clock stability timer.  
[3:0] System clock stability period  
System clock period, Bits[19:16].  
Default: 0x00.  
Rev. A | Page 73 of 104  
 
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
GENERAL CONFIGURATION (REGISTER 0x0200 TO REGISTER 0x0214)  
Multifunction Pin Control (M0 to M7) and IRQ Pin Control (Register 0x0200 to Register 0x0209)  
Note that the default setting for the M0 to M5 multifunction pins and the IRQ is that of a 3-level logic input; M6 and M7 are unused inputs at  
startup. After startup, M0 to M7 are 2-level inputs or 2-level outputs, based on the settings of Register 0x0200 to Register 0x0208. Setting  
Bit 0 in Register 0x0200 to 1 enables M0 to M7 pin functionality.  
Table 46. Multifunction Pin (M0 to M7) Control  
Address  
Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x0200  
[7:1] Reserved  
Reserved.  
0
Enable M pins and IRQ pin  
function  
0 (default) = disables the function of the M pins and IRQ pin control register (Address  
0x0201 to Address 0x0209) and the M pins and IRQ pin are in 3-level logic input state.  
1 = the M pins and IRQ pin are out of 3-level logic input state. Enables the function of the  
M pins and IRQ pin control register (Address 0x0201 to Address 0x0209).  
0x0201  
7
M0 output/input  
In/out control for M0 pin.  
0 = input (2-level logic control pin).  
1 (default) = output (2-level logic status pin).  
[6:0] M0 function  
See Table 129 and Table 130. Default: 0xB0 = REFA valid.  
In/out control for M1 pin (same as M0).  
0x0202  
0x0203  
0x0204  
0x0205  
0x0206  
0x0207  
0x0208  
7
M1 output/input  
[6:0] M1 function  
See Table 129 and Table 130. Default: 0xB1 = REFB valid.  
In/out control for M2 pin (same as M0).  
7
M2 output/input  
[6:0] M2 function  
See Table 129 and Table 130. Default: 0xC0 = REFA active.  
In/out control for M3 pin (same as M0).  
7
M3 output/input  
[6:0] M3 function  
See Table 129 and Table 130. Default: 0xC1 = REFB active.  
In/out control for M3 pin (same as M0).  
7
M4 output/input  
[6:0] M4 function  
See Table 129 and Table 130. Default: 0xB2 = REFC valid.  
In/out control for M3 pin (same as M0).  
7
M5 output/input  
[6:0] M5 function  
See Table 129 and Table 130. Default: 0xB3 = REFD valid.  
In/out control for M3 pin (same as M0).  
7
M6 output/input  
[6:0] M6 function  
See Table 129 and Table 130. Default: 0xC2 = REFC active.  
In/out control for M3 pin (same as M0).  
7
M7 output/input  
[6:0] M7 function  
See Table 129 and Table 130. Default: 0xC3 = REFD active.  
Table 47. IRQ Pin Output Mode  
Address  
Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x0209  
[7:5] Reserved  
Default: 000b  
[4:3] Status signal at IRQ pin  
This selection is valid only when Address 0x0209[2] = 1  
00 = DPLL phase locked  
01 = DPLL frequency locked  
10 = system clock PLL locked  
11 (default) = (DPLL phase locked) AND (system clock PLL locked) AND (APLL locked)  
2
Use IRQ pin for status signal  
0 = uses IRQ pin to monitor IRQ event  
1 (default) = uses IRQ pin to monitor internal status signals  
[1:0] IRQ pin driver type  
Select the output mode of the IRQ pin  
00 = NMOS, open drain (requires an external pull-up resistor)  
01 = PMOS, open drain (requires an external pull-down resistor)  
10 = CMOS, active high  
11 (default) = CMOS, active low  
Rev. A | Page 74 of 104  
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
IRQ MASK (REGISTER 0x020A TO REGISTER 0x020F)  
The IRQ mask register bits form a one-to-one correspondence with the bits of the IRQ monitor register (0x0D02 to 0x0D09). When set to  
Logic 1, the IRQ mask bits enable the corresponding IRQ monitor bits to indicate an IRQ event. The default for all IRQ mask bits is Logic 0,  
which prevents the IRQ monitor from detecting any internal interrupts.  
Table 48. IRQ Mask for SYSCLK  
Address  
Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x020A  
[7:6] Reserved  
Reserved  
5
4
3
2
1
0
SYSCLK unlocked  
Enables IRQ for indicating a SYSCLK PLL state transition from locked to unlocked  
Enables IRQ for indicating a SYSCLK PLL state transition from unlocked to locked  
Enables IRQ for indicating an APLL state transition from locked to unlocked  
Enables IRQ for indicating an APLL state transition from unlocked to locked  
Enables IRQ for indicating that APLL (LCVCO) calibration has completed  
Enables IRQ for indicating that APLL (LCVCO) calibration has begun  
SYSCLK locked  
APLL unlocked  
APLL locked  
APLL cal complete  
APLL cal started  
Table 49. IRQ Mask for Distribution Sync, Watchdog Timer, and EEPROM  
Address  
Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x020B  
[7:5] Reserved  
Reserved  
4
3
2
1
0
Pin program end  
Enables IRQ for indicating successful completion of a pin program ROM load  
Enables IRQ for indicating a distribution sync event  
Enables IRQ for indicating expiration of the watchdog timer  
Enables IRQ for indicating a fault during an EEPROM load or save operation  
Enables IRQ for indicating successful completion of an EEPROM load or save operation  
Sync distribution  
Watchdog timer  
EEPROM fault  
EEPROM complete  
Table 50. IRQ Mask for the Digital PLL  
Address  
Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x020C  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Switching  
Enables IRQ for indicating that the DPLL is switching to a new reference  
Enables IRQ for indicating that the DPLL has entered closed-loop operation  
Enables IRQ for indicating that the DPLL has entered free run mode  
Enables IRQ for indicating that the DPLL has entered holdover mode  
Enables IRQ for indicating that the DPLL lost frequency lock  
Enables IRQ for indicating that the DPLL has acquired frequency lock  
Enables IRQ for indicating that the DPLL lost phase lock  
Enables IRQ for indicating that the DPLL has acquired phase lock  
Closed  
Freerun  
Holdover  
Frequency unlocked  
Frequency locked  
Phase unlocked  
Phase locked  
Table 51. IRQ Mask for History Update, Frequency Limit and Phase Slew Limit  
Address  
Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x020D  
[7:5] Reserved  
Reserved  
4
3
2
1
History updated  
Enables IRQ for indicating the occurrence of a tuning word history update  
Enables IRQ for indicating a frequency limit state transition from clamped to unclamped  
Enables IRQ for indicating a state transition of the frequency limiter from unclamped to clamped  
Frequency unclamped  
Frequency clamped  
Phase slew unlimited  
Enables IRQ for indicating a state transition of the phase slew limiter from slew limiting to not  
slew limiting  
0
Phase slew limited  
Enables IRQ for indicating a state transition of the phase slew limiter from not slew limiting to  
slew limiting  
Rev. A | Page 75 of 104  
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
Table 52. IRQ Mask for Reference Inputs  
Address Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x020E  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
REFB validated  
REFB fault cleared  
REFB fault  
Enables IRQ for indicating that REFB has been validated  
Enables IRQ for indicating that REFB has been cleared of a previous fault  
Enables IRQ for indicating that REFB has been faulted  
Reserved  
Reserved  
REFA validated  
REFA fault cleared  
REFA fault  
Enables IRQ for indicating that REFA has been validated  
Enables IRQ for indicating that REFA has been cleared of a previous fault  
Enables IRQ for indicating that REFA has been faulted  
Reserved  
[7:0] Reserved  
0x020F  
Table 53. Watchdog Timer 11  
Address Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x0210  
0x0211  
[7:0] Watchdog timer (ms)  
[7:0]  
Watchdog timer, Bits[7:0]; default: 0x00  
Watchdog timer, Bits[15:8]; default: 0x00  
1 Note that the watchdog timer is expressed in units of milliseconds (ms). The default value is 0 (disabled).  
DPLL CONFIGURATION (REGISTER 0x0300 TO REGISTER 0x032E)  
Table 54. Free Run Frequency Tuning Word1  
Address Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x0300  
0x0301  
0x0302  
0x0303  
[7:0] 30-bit free run frequency tuning word Free run frequency tuning word, Bits[7:0]; default: 0x11  
[7:0]  
Free run frequency tuning word, Bits[15:8]; default: 0x15  
Free run frequency tuning word, Bits[23:9]; default: 0x64  
Reserved  
[7:0]  
[7:6] Reserved  
[5:0] 30-bit free run frequency word  
Free run frequency tuning word, Bits[29:24]; default: 0x1B  
1 Note that the default free run tuning word is 0x1B641511, which is used for 8 kHz/19.44 MHz = 622.08 MHz translation.  
Table 55. Digital Oscillator Control  
Address Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x0304 [7:6] Reserved  
Default: 00b  
5
4
DCO 4-level output  
Reserved  
0 (default) = DCO 3-level output mode  
1 = enables DCO 4-level output mode  
Reserved (must be set to 1b)  
Reserved (default: 0x0)  
[3:0] Reserved  
Table 56. DPLL Frequency Clamp  
Address  
Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x0306  
[7:0] Lower limit of pull-in range (expressed Lower limit pull-in range, Bits[7:0].  
as a 20-bit frequency tuning word)  
Default: 0x51.  
0x0307  
0x0308  
[7:0]  
Lower limit pull-in range, Bits[15:8].  
Default: 0xB8.  
Reserved  
[7:4]  
[3:0]  
Default: 0x0.  
Lower limit of pull-in range  
Lower limit pull-in range, Bits[19:16].  
Default: 0x2.  
0x0309  
0x030A  
0x030B  
[7:0] Upper limit of pull-in range  
(expressed as a 20-bit frequency  
Upper limit pull-in range, Bits[7:0].  
Default: 0x3E.  
tuning word)  
[7:0]  
Upper limit pull-in range, Bits[15:8].  
Default: 0x0A.  
Reserved  
[7:4]  
Default: 0x0.  
[3:0] Upper limit of pull-in range  
Upper limit pull-in range, Bits[19:16].  
Default: 0xB.  
Rev. A | Page 76 of 104  
 
 
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
Table 57. Fixed Closed-Loop Phase Lock Offset  
Address  
Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x030C  
[7:0] Fixed phase lock offset (signed; ps)  
Fixed phase lock offset, Bits[7:0].  
Default: 0x00.  
0x030D  
0x030E  
0x030F  
[7:0]  
[7:0]  
Fixed phase lock offset, Bits[15:8].  
Default 0x00.  
Fixed phase lock offset, Bits[23:16].  
Default: 0x00.  
[7:6] Reserved  
Reserved; default: 0x0.  
[5:0] Fixed phase lock offset (signed; ps)  
Fixed phase lock offset, Bits[29:24].  
Default: 0x00.  
Table 58. Incremental Closed-Loop Phase Lock Offset Step Size1  
Address  
Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x0310  
[7:0] Incremental phase lock offset  
step size (ps)  
Incremental phase lock offset step size, Bits[7:0].  
Default: 0x00.  
This controls the static phase offset of the DPLL while it is locked.  
0x0311  
[7:0]  
Incremental phase lock offset step size, Bits[15:8].  
Default: 0x00.  
This controls the static phase offset of the DPLL while it is locked.  
1 Note that the default incremental closed-loop phase lock offset step size value is 0x0000 = 0 (0 ns).  
Table 59. Phase Slew Rate Limit  
Address  
Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x0312  
[7:0] Phase slew rate limit (μs/sec)  
Phase slew rate limit, Bits[7:0].  
Default: 0x00.  
This register controls the maximum allowable phase slewing during transients  
and reference switching.  
The default phase slew rate limit is 0, or disabled. Minimum useful value is 310 μs/sec.  
0x0313  
[7:0]  
Phase slew rate limit, Bits[15:8].  
Default: 0x00.  
Table 60. History Accumulation Timer  
Address Bits Bit Name  
[7:0] History accumulation timer (ms)  
Description  
0x0314  
History accumulation timer bits[7:0].  
Default: 0x0A. For Register 0x0314 and Register 0x0315, 0x000A = 10 ms.  
Maximum is 65 sec. This register controls the amount of tuning word averaging used  
to determine the tuning word used in holdover. Never program a timer value of  
zero. The default value is 0x000A = 10 decimal, which equates to 10 ms  
0x0315  
[7:0]  
History accumulation timer bits[15:8].  
Default: 0x00.  
Rev. A | Page 77 of 104  
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
Table 61. History Mode  
Address Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0316 [7:5] Reserved  
Reserved.  
4
3
Single sample fallback  
Persistent history  
Controls holdover history. If tuning word history is not available for the reference  
that was active just prior to holdover, then:  
0 (default) = uses the free run frequency tuning word register value.  
1 = uses the last tuning word from the DPLL.  
Controls holdover history initialization. When switching to a new reference:  
0 (default) = clears the tuning word history.  
1 = retain the previous tuning word history.  
[2:0] Incremental average  
History mode value from 0 to 7 (default: 0).  
When set to non-zero, causes the first history accumulation to update prior to the  
first complete averaging period. After the first full interval, updates occur only at the  
full period.  
0 (default) = update only after the full interval has elapsed.  
1 = update at 1/2 the full interval.  
2 = update at 1/4 and 1/2 of the full interval.  
3 = update at 1/8, 1/4, and 1/2 of the full interval.  
...  
7 = update at 1/256, 1/128, 1/64, 1/32, 1/16, 1/8, 1/4, and 1/2 of the full interval.  
Table 62. Base Digital Loop Filter with High Phase Margin (PM = 88.5°, BW = 0.1 Hz, Third Pole Frequency = 10 Hz, N1 = 1)1  
Address Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0317  
0x0318  
0x0319  
[7:0] HPM Alpha-0 linear  
[7:0]  
Alpha-0 coefficient linear bits[7:0]. Default: 0x8C  
Alpha-0 coefficient linear bits[15:8]  
Reserved  
7
Reserved  
[6:0] HPM Alpha-1 exponent  
[7:0] HPM Beta-0 linear  
[7:0]  
Alpha-1 coefficient exponent bits[6:0]  
Beta-0 coefficient linear bits[7:0]  
Beta-0 coefficient linear bits[15:8]  
Reserved  
0x031A  
0x031B  
0x031C  
7
Reserved  
[6:0] HPM Beta-1 exponent  
[7:0] HPM Gamma-0 linear  
[7:0]  
Beta-1 coefficient exponent bits[6:0]  
Gamma-0 coefficient linear bits[7:0]  
Gamma-0 coefficient linear bits[15:8]  
Reserved  
0x031D  
0x031E  
0x031F  
7
Reserved  
[6:0] HPM Gamma-1 exponent  
[7:0] HPM Delta-0 linear  
[7:0]  
Gamma-1 coefficient exponent bits[6:0]  
Delta-0 coefficient linear bits[7:0]  
Delta-0 coefficient linear bits[15:8]  
Reserved  
0x0320  
0x0321  
0x0322  
7
Reserved  
[6:0] HPM Delta-1 exponent  
Delta-1 coefficient exponent bits[6:0]  
1 Note that the base digital loop filter coefficients (α, β, γ, and δ) have the following general form: x(2y), where x is the linear component and y is the exponential  
component of the coefficient. The value of the linear component (x) constitutes a fraction, where 0 ≤ x ≤ 1. The exponential component (y) is a signed integer.  
Rev. A | Page 78 of 104  
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
Table 63. Base Digital Loop Filter with Normal Phase Margin (PM = 70°, BW = 0.1 Hz, Third Pole Frequency = 2 Hz, N1 = 1)1  
Address  
0x0323  
0x0324  
0x0325  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
[7:0] NPM Alpha-0 linear  
[7:0]  
Alpha-0 coefficient linear, Bits[7:0]  
Alpha-0 coefficient linear, Bits[15:8]  
Reserved  
7
Reserved  
[6:0] NPM Alpha-1 exponent  
[7:0] NPM Beta-0 linear  
[7:0]  
Alpha-1 coefficient exponent, Bits[6:0]  
Beta-0 coefficient linear, Bits[7:0]  
Beta-0 coefficient linear, Bits[15:8]  
Reserved  
0x0326  
0x0327  
0x0328  
7
Reserved  
[6:0] NPM Beta-1 exponent  
[7:0] NPM Gamma-0 linear  
[7:0]  
Beta-1 coefficient exponent, Bits[6:0]  
Gamma-0 coefficient linear, Bits[7:0]  
Gamma-0 coefficient linear, Bits[15:8]  
Reserved  
0x0329  
0x032A  
0x032B  
7
Reserved  
[6:0] NPM Gamma-1 exponent  
[7:0] NPM Delta-0 linear  
[7:0]  
Gamma-1 coefficient exponent, Bits[6:0]  
Delta-0 coefficient linear, Bits[7:0]  
Delta-0 coefficient linear, Bits[15:8]  
Reserved  
0x032C  
0x032D  
0x032E  
7
Reserved  
[6:0] NPM Delta-1 exponent  
Delta-1 coefficient exponent, Bits[6:0]  
1 Note that the digital loop filter base coefficients (α, β, γ, and δ) have the following general form: x(2y), where x is the linear component and y is the exponential  
component of the coefficient. The value of the linear component (x) constitutes a fraction, where 0 ≤ x ≤ 1. The exponential component (y) is a signed integer.  
OUTPUT PLL CONFIGURATION (REGISTER 0x0400 TO REGISTER 0x0408)  
Table 64. Output PLL Setting1  
Address  
Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x0400  
[7:0] Output PLL (APLL)  
charge pump current  
LSB = 3.5 μA  
00000001b = 1 × LSB; 00000010b = 2 × LSB; 11111111b = 255 × LSB  
Default: 0x81 = 451 μA CP current  
0x0401  
[7:0] APLL N divider  
Division = 14 to 255  
Default: 0x14 = divide-by-20  
0x0402  
0x0403  
[7:0] Reserved  
Reserved; default: 0x00  
[7:6] APLL loop filter control  
Pole 2 resistor Rp2; default: 0x07  
Rp2 (Ω)  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
500 (default)  
333  
250  
200  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
[5:3]  
Zero resistor, Rzero  
Rzero (Ω)  
1500 (default)  
1250  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1000  
930  
1250  
1000  
750  
680  
Rev. A | Page 79 of 104  
 
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
Address  
Bits Bit Name  
Description  
Pole 1 Cp1.  
Cp1 (pF)  
[2:0]  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
0
20  
80  
100  
20  
40  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
100  
120 (default)  
0x0404  
0x0405  
[7:1] Reserved  
Default: 0x00.  
0
Bypass internal Rzero  
0 (default) = uses the internal Rzero resistor.  
1 = bypasses the internal Rzero resistor (makes Rzero = 0 and requires the use of a series  
external zero resistor).  
[7:4] Reserved  
Default: 0x2.  
3
APLL locked controlled  
sync  
0 (default) = the clock distribution sync function is not enabled until the output PLL (APLL) is  
calibrated and locked. After APLL calibration and lock, the output clock distribution sync is  
armed, and the sync function for the clock outputs is under the control of Register 0x0500.  
1 = overrides the lock detector state of the output PLL; allows Register 0x0500 to control  
the output sync function, regardless of the APLL lock status.  
[2:1] Reserved  
Manual APLL  
VCO calibration  
Default: 00b.  
0
1 = initiates VCO calibration. (Calibration occurs on low-to-high transition.)  
0 (default) = does nothing. This is not an autoclearing bit.  
1 Note that the default APLL loop BW is 180 KHz.  
Table 65. Reserved  
Address  
Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x0406  
[7:0] Reserved  
Default: 0x00  
Table 66. RF Divider Setting  
Address  
Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x0407  
[7:4] RF Divider 2 division  
0000/0001 = 3  
0010 = 4  
0011 = 5  
0100 = 6 (default)  
0101 = 7  
0110 = 8  
0111 = 9  
1000 = 10  
1001 = 11  
[3:0] RF Divider 1 division  
0000/0001 = 3  
0010 = 4  
0011 = 5  
0100 = 6 (default)  
0101 = 7  
0110 = 8  
0111 = 9  
1000 = 10  
1001 = 11  
0x0408  
[7:5] Reserved  
RF divider start-up mode  
Reserved. Default: 000b  
4
0 (default) = RF dividers are held in power-down until the APLL feedback divider is  
detected, which ensures proper RF divider operation when exiting full power-down  
1 = RF dividers are not held in power-down until the APLL feedback divider is detected  
[3:2] Reserved  
Reserved. Default: 00b  
1
PD RF Divider 2  
0 = enables RF Divider 2  
1 (default) = powers down RF Divider 2  
0
PD RF Divider 1  
0 (default) = enables RF Divider 1  
1 = powers down RF Divider 1  
Rev. A | Page 80 of 104  
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
OUTPUT CLOCK DISTRIBUTION (REGISTER 0x0500 TO REGISTER 0x0515)  
Table 67. Clock Distribution Output Synchronization Settings  
Address  
Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x0500  
7
6
5
Mask Channel 3 sync  
Masks the synchronous reset to the Channel 3 (M3) divider.  
0 (default) = unmasked. The output drivers do not toggle until a SYNC pulse occurs.  
1 = masked. Setting this bit asynchronously releases Channel 3 from the static SYNC state,  
thus allowing the Channel 3 divider to toggle. Channel 3 ignores all SYNC events while  
this bit is set. Setting this bit does not enable the output drivers connected to this channel. In  
addition, the output distribution sync also depends on the setting of Register 0x0405[3].  
Mask Channel 2 sync  
Mask Channel 1 sync  
Masks the synchronous reset to the Channel 2 (M2) divider.  
0 (default) = unmasked. The output drivers do not toggle until a SYNC pulse occurs.  
1 = masked. Setting this bit asynchronously releases Channel 2 from the static SYNC state,  
thus allowing the Channel 2 divider to toggle. Channel 2 ignores all SYNC events while  
this bit is set. Setting this bit does not enable the output drivers connected to this channel. In  
addition, the output distribution sync also depends on the setting of Register 0x0405[3].  
Masks the synchronous reset to the Channel 1 (M2) divider.  
0 (default) = unmasked. The output drivers do not toggle until a SYNC pulse occurs.  
1 = masked. Setting this bit asynchronously releases Channel 1 from the static SYNC state,  
thus allowing the Channel 1 divider to toggle. Channel 1 ignores all SYNC events while  
this bit is set. Setting this bit does not enable the output drivers connected to this  
channel. In addition, the output distribution sync also depends on the setting of Register  
0x0405[3].  
4
Mask Channel 0 sync  
Masks the synchronous reset to the Channel 0 (M0) divider.  
0 (default) = unmasked. The output drivers do not toggle until a SYNC pulse occurs.  
1 = masked. Setting this bit asynchronously releases Channel 0 from the static SYNC state,  
thus allowing the Channel 0 divider to toggle. Channel 0 ignores all SYNC events while  
this bit is set. Setting this bit does not enable the output drivers connected to this channel. In  
addition, the output distribution sync also depends on the setting of Register 0x0405[3].  
3
2
Reserved  
Default: 0b.  
Sync source selection  
Selects the sync source for the clock distribution output channels.  
0 (default) = direct. The sync pulse happens on the next I/O update.  
1 = active reference.  
Note that the output distribution sync also depends on the APLL being calibrated and  
locked unless Register 0x0405[3] = 1b.  
[1:0] Automatic sync mode  
Autosync mode.  
00 = disabled. A sync command must be issued manually, or by using the mask sync bits  
in this register (Bits[7:4]).  
01 = sync on DPLL frequency lock.  
10 (default) = sync on DPLL phase lock.  
11 = reserved.  
Rev. A | Page 81 of 104  
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
Table 68. Distribution OUT0 Setting  
Address  
Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x0501  
7
Enable 3.3 V CMOS driver 0 (default) = disables 3.3V CMOS driver; the OUT5 1.8V logic is controlled by Register 0x0501[6:4].  
1 = enables 3.3 V CMOS driver as operating mode of OUT0.  
This bit should be enabled only if Bits[6:4] are in CMOS mode.  
[6:4] OUT0 format  
This control is valid when Register 0x0501[7] = 0.  
When Register 0x0501[7] = 1, OUT5 is in 3.3 V CMOS mode and these bits are ignored.  
Select the operating mode of OUT0.  
000 = PD, tristate.  
001 (default) = HSTL.  
010 = LVDS.  
011 = reserved.  
100 = CMOS, both outputs active.  
101 = CMOS, P output active, N output power-down.  
110 = CMOS, N output active, P output power-down.  
111 = reserved.  
[3:2] OUT0 polarity  
Control the OUT0 polarity.  
00 (default) = positive, negative.  
01 = positive, positive.  
10 = negative, positive.  
11 = negative, nevative.  
1
0
OUT0 drive strength  
Controls the output drive capability of OUT0.  
0 (default) = CMOS: low drive strength; LVDS: 3.5 mA nominal.  
1 = CMOS: normal drive strength; LVDS: 4.5 mA nominal (LVDS boost mode).  
Note that this is only in 3.3 V CMOS mode for CMOS strength.  
1.8 V CMOS has only the low drive strength.  
Enable OUT0  
Enables/disables (1b/0b) OUT0 1.8 V driver (default is disabled).  
This bit does not enable/disable OUT0 if Bit 7 of this register is set.  
Table 69. Distribution Channel 0 Divider Setting  
Address  
Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x0502  
[7:0] Channel 0 (M0)  
division ratio  
10-bit channel divider bits[7:0] (LSB).  
Division equals channel divider, Bits[9:0] + 1.  
(Bits[9:0] = 0 is divide-by-1, Bits[9:0] = 1 is divide-by-2…Bits[9:0] = 1023 is divide-by-1024)  
0x0503  
[7:4] Reserved  
Reserved.  
3
Channel 0 PD  
0 (default) = normal operation.  
1 = powers down Channel 0.  
2
Select RF Divider 2  
1 = selects RF Divider 2 as prescaler for Channel 0 divider.  
0 (default) = selects RF Divider 1 as prescaler for Channel 0 divider.  
[1:0] Channel 0 (M0)  
division ratio  
10-bit channel divider, Bits[9:8] (MSB)  
0x0504  
[7:6] Reserved  
Reserved. Default: 00b  
[5:0] Channel 0 divider phase  
Divider initial phase after sync relative to the divider input clock (from the RF divider  
output). LSB is ½ of a period of the divider input clock. Default: 00000b.  
Phase = 0 is no phase offset.  
Phase = 1 is ½ a period offset.  
Rev. A | Page 82 of 104  
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
Table 70. Distribution OUT1 Setting  
Address  
Bits Bit Name  
Reserved  
[6:4] OUT1 format  
Description  
0x0505  
7
Reserved; default: 0b  
Select the operating mode of OUT1  
000 = PD, tristate  
001 (default) = HSTL  
010 = LVDS  
011 = reserved  
100 = CMOS, both outputs active  
101 = CMOS, P output active, N output power-down  
110 = CMOS, N output active, P output power-down  
111 = reserved  
[3:2] OUT1 polarity  
Configure the OUT1 polarity in CMOS mode and are active in CMOS mode only  
00 (default) = positive, negative  
01 = positive, positive  
10 = negative, positive  
11 = negative, negative  
1
OUT1 drive strength  
Controls the output drive capability of OUT1  
0 (default) = LVDS: 3.5 mA nominal  
1 = LVDS: 4.5 mA nominal (LVDS boost mode)  
No CMOS control because OUT1 is 1.8 V CMOS only  
0
7
Enable OUT1  
Reserved  
Setting this bit enables the OUT1 driver (default is disabled)  
Reserved; default: 0b  
0x0506  
[6:4] OUT2 format  
Select the operating mode of OUT2  
000 = PD, tristate  
001 (default) = HSTL  
010 = LVDS  
011 = reserved  
100 = CMOS, both outputs active  
101 = CMOS, P output active, N output power-down  
110 = CMOS, N output active, P output power-down  
111 = reserved  
[3:2] OUT2 polarity  
Configure the OUT2 polarity in CMOS mode and are active in CMOS mode only  
00 (default) = positive, negative  
01 = positive, positive  
10 = negative, positive  
11 = negative, negative  
1
0
OUT2 drive strength  
Controls the output drive capability of OUT2  
0 (default) = LVDS: 3.5 mA nominal  
1 = LVDS: 4.5 mA nominal (LVDS boost mode)  
No CMOS control because OUT2 is 1.8 V CMOS only  
Enable OUT2  
Setting this bit enables the OUT2 driver (default is disabled)  
Table 71. Distribution Channel 1 Divider Setting  
Address  
0x0507  
0x0508  
0x0509  
Bits Bit Name  
Description  
[7:0] Channel 1 divider  
[7:0] Channel 1 divider  
[7:0] Channel 1 divider  
The same control for Channel 1 divider as in Register 0x0502 for Channel 0 divider  
The same control for Channel 1 divider as in Register 0x0503 for Channel 0 divider  
The same control for Channel 1 divider as in Register 0x0504 for Channel 0 divider  
Table 72. Clock Distribution Channel 2 and OUT3, OUT4 Driver Settings  
Address  
0x050A  
0x050B  
0x050C  
0x050D  
0x050E  
Bits Bit Name  
Description  
[7:0] OUT3  
The same control for OUT3 as in Register 0x0505 for OUT1  
The same control for OUT4 as in Register 0x0505 for OUT1  
The same control for Channel 2 divider as in Register 0x0502 for Channel 0 divider  
The same control for Channel 2 divider as in Register 0x0503 for Channel 0 divider  
The same control for Channel 2 divider as in Register 0x0504 for Channel 0 divider  
[7:0] OUT4  
[7:0] Channel 2 divider  
[7:0] Channel 2 divider  
[7:0] Channel 2 divider  
Rev. A | Page 83 of 104  
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
Table 73. Clock Distribution Channel 3 and OUT5 Driver Settings  
Address  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x050F  
7
Enable 3.3 V CMOS driver 0 (default) = disable 3.3 V CMOS driver; the OUT5 1.8 V logic is controlled by Register 0x050F[6:4].  
1 = enable 3.3 V CMOS driver as operating mode of OUT5.  
This bit should be enabled only if Bits[6:4] are in CMOS mode.  
[6:4] OUT5 format  
This control is valid when Register 0x050F[7] = 0; when Register 0x050F[7] = 1, OUT5 is in 3.3 V  
CMOS mode and these bits are ignored.  
Select the operating mode of OUT5.  
000 = PD, tristate.  
001 (default) = HSTL.  
010 = LVDS.  
011 = reserved.  
100 = CMOS, both outputs active.  
101 = CMOS, P output active, N output power-down.  
110 = CMOS, N output active, P output power-down.  
111 = reserved.  
[3:2] OUT5 polarity  
Control the OUT5 polarity.  
00 (default) = positive, negative.  
01 = positive, positive.  
10 = negative, positive.  
11 = negative, negative.  
1
0
OUT5 drive strength  
Controls the output drive capability of OUT5.  
0 (default) = CMOS: low drive strength, LVDS: 3.5 mA nominal.  
1 = CMOS: normal drive strength, LVDS: 4.5 mA nominal (LVDS boost mode).  
Note that this is only in 3.3 V CMOS mode for CMOS strength.  
1.8 V CMOS has only the low drive strength.  
OUT5 enable  
Enables/disables (1b/0b) OUT5 1.8 V driver (default is disabled).  
This bit does not enable/disable OUT5 if Bit 7 of this register is set.  
0x0510  
0x0511  
0x0512  
0x0513  
[7:0] Channel 3, Divider 1 (M3) 10-bit channel divider, Bits[7:0] (LSB) (default: 0x03).  
division ratio  
Division equals channel divider, Bits[9:0] + 1.  
(Bits[9:0] = 0 is divide-by-1, Bits[9:0] = 1 is divide-by-2…Bits[9:0] = 1023 is divide-by-1024).  
[7:2] Reserved  
Reserved.  
[1:0] Channel 3, Divider 1 (M3) 10-bit channel divider, Bits[9:8] (MSB) (default: 0x00).  
division ratio  
[7:0] Channel 3, Divider 2  
(M3b) division ratio  
10-bit channel divider, Bits[7:0] (LSB).  
Division equals channel divider bits[9:0] + 1 .  
(Bits[9:0] = 0 is divide-by-1, Bits[9:0] = 1 is divide-by-2…Bits[9:0] = 1023 is divide-by-1024).  
[7:4] Reserved  
Reserved.  
4
Channel 3 doubler  
0 (default) = normal operation.  
1 = enables Channel 3 clock doubler. This bit activates an internal clock doubler that doubles  
the frequency of the Channel 3 divider. In this mode, Channel 3, Divider 2 is bypassed.  
3
2
PD Channel 3  
0 (default) = normal operation.  
1 = powers down Channel 3.  
Select RF divider  
for Channel 2  
1 = selects RF Divider 2 as prescaler for the Channel 3 divider.  
0 (default) = selects RF Divider 1 as a prescaler for the Channel 3 divider.  
[1:0] Channel 3, Divider 2  
(M3b) division ratio  
10-bit channel divider, Bits[9:8] (MSB).  
0x0514  
0x0515  
[7:0] Channel 3, Divider 1 (M3) The same control for Channel 3, Divider 1 phase as found in Register 0x0504 for Channel 0  
phase  
divider phase (default: 0x00).  
[7:0] Channel 3, Divider 2  
(M3b) phase  
The same control for Channel 3, Divider 2 phase as found in Register 0x0504 for Channel 0  
divider phase (default: 0x00).  
Rev. A | Page 84 of 104  
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
REFERENCE INPUTS (REGISTER 0x0500 TO REGISTER 0x0507)  
Table 74. Reference Power-Down1  
Address  
Bits  
[7:4]  
3
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0600  
Reserved  
Default: 0x0  
REFD power-down  
REFC power-down  
REFB power-down  
REFA power-down  
Power down REFD input receiver (default: not powered down).  
Power down REFC input receiver (default: not powered down).  
Power down REFB input receiver (default: not powered down).  
Power down REFA input receiver (default: not powered down).  
2
1
0
1 When all bits are set the reference receiver section enters a deep sleep mode.  
Table 75. Reference Logic Family  
Address  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0601  
[7:6]  
REFD logic family  
Select logic family for REFD input receiver; only REFD_P is used in CMOS mode  
00 (default) = differential  
01 = 1.2 V to 1.5 V CMOS  
10 = 1.8 V to 2.5 V CMOS  
11 = 3.0 V to 3.3 V CMOS  
[5:4]  
[3:2]  
[1:0]  
REFC logic family  
REFB logic family  
REFA logic family  
Same as Register 0x0601[7:6] for REFC  
Same as Register 0x0601[7:6] for REFB  
Same as Register 0x0601[7:6] for REFA  
Table 76. Reference Priority Setting  
Address  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0602  
[7:6]  
REFD priority family  
User-assigned priority level (0 to 3) of the reference associated with REFB, which ranks that  
reference relative to the others.  
00 (default) = 0.  
01 = 1.  
10 = 2.  
11 = 3.  
[5:4]  
[3:2]  
[1:0]  
REFC priority family  
REFB priority family  
REFA priority family  
Same as Register 0x0602[7:6] for REFC.  
Same as Register 0x0602[7:6] for REFB.  
Same as Register 0x0602[7:6] for REFA.  
Rev. A | Page 85 of 104  
 
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
FRAME SYNCHRONIZATION (REGISTER 0x0640 TO REGISTER 0x0641)  
Table 77. Frame Sync Setting  
Address  
Bit(s)  
[7:1]  
0
Bit Name  
Reserved  
Description  
0x0640  
Reserved; default: 0x00.  
Enable Fsync  
Enable frame synchronization.  
0 (default) = frame synchronization disabled.  
1 = frame synchronization enabled.  
0x0641  
[7:4]  
3
Reserved  
Reserved; default: 0x00.  
Validate Fsync ref  
Setting this bit forces the reference validation logic to declare REFA valid only if the  
REFB (the sync pulse) input is also valid. This bit can be thought as a logical AND of  
REFA VALID and REFB VALID signals . If REFC is selected, this bit requires that REFD  
(the sync pulse) input also be valid before declaring REFC valid.  
0 (default) = only the selected reference input must be valid.  
1 = the sync pulse input must also be valid to validate the selected input.  
2
Fsync one shot  
Selects one-shot or level-sensitve frame sync function.  
0 (default) = use level-sensitive frame sync. Frame sync occurs on every edge of the  
frame pulse.  
1 = use one-shot frame sync. Frame sync occurs only on the first frame sync pulse  
(on REFB or REFD). User must re-arm by raising the SYNC pin high and then low, or  
by clearing and resetting the arm soft Fsync bit. As with all buffered regsiters, an  
I/O update is required (Register 0x0005[0] = 0x01) after writing this register.  
1
0
Fsync arm method  
Arm soft Fsync  
Selects which signal is used to arm the frame sync  
0 (default) = use SYNC pin.  
1 = use arm soft Fsync (Register 0x0641[0]).  
Arms frame sync after I/O update. Next pulse on REFB or REFD is the sync pulse. The  
Fsync arm method bit must also be set for this bit to take effect.  
0 = (default); frame sync unarmed.  
1 = frame sync armed.  
Rev. A | Page 86 of 104  
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
DPLL PROFILE REGISTERS (REGISTER 0x0700 TO REGISTER 0x07E6)  
Note that the default values of the REFA and REFC profiles are as follows: input frequency=19.44 MHz, output frequency = 622.08 MHz/  
155.52 MHz, loop bandwidth = 400 Hz, normal phase margin, inner tolerance = 5%, and outer tolerance = 10%.  
The default values of the REFB and REFD profiles are as follows: input frequency = 8 kHz, output frequency = 622.08 MHz/155.52 MHz,  
loop bandwidth = 100 Hz, normal phase margin, inner tolerance = 5%, and outer tolerance = 10%.  
REFA Profile (Register 0x0700 to Register 0x0726)  
Table 78. Reference Period—REFA Profile  
Address  
0x0700  
0x0701  
0x0702  
0x0703  
0x0704  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
[7:0] Nominal reference period (fs) Nominal reference period bits[7:0] (default: 0xC9).  
[7:0]  
[7:0]  
[7:0]  
[7:0]  
Nominal reference period bits[15:8] (default: 0xEA).  
Nominal reference period bits[23:16] (default: 0x10).  
Nominal reference period bits[31:24] (default: 0x03).  
Nominal reference period bits[39:32] (default: 0x00).  
Default for Register 0x0700 to Register 0x0704 = 0x000310EAC9 = 51.44 ns (1/19.44 MHz).  
Table 79. Reference Period Tolerance—REFA Profile  
Address  
0x0705  
0x0706  
0x0707  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
[7:0] Inner tolerance  
[7:0]  
Input reference frequency monitor inner tolerance, Bits[7:0] (default: 0x14).  
Input reference frequency monitor inner tolerance, Bits[15:8] (default: 0x00).  
Default: 0x0.  
[7:4] Reserved  
[3:0] Inner tolerance  
Input reference frequency monitor inner tolerance, Bits[19:16].  
Default for Register 0x0705 to Register 0x707 = 0x000014 = 20 (5% or 50,000 ppm).  
The Stratum 3 clock requires inner tolerance of 9.2 ppm and outer tolerance of  
12 ppm; an SMC clock requires an outer tolerance of 48 ppm.  
The allowable range for the inner tolerance is 0x00A (10%) to 0x8FF (1 ppm).  
The tolerance of the input frequency monitor is only as accurate as the system clock  
frequency.  
0x0708  
0x0709  
0x070A  
[7:0] Outer tolerance  
[7:0]  
Input reference frequency monitor outer tolerance, Bits[7:0] (default: 0x0A).  
Input reference frequency monitor outer tolerance, Bits[15:8] (default: 0x00).  
Reserved.  
[7:4] Reserved  
[3:0] Outer tolerance  
Input reference frequency monitor outer tolerance, Bits[19:16].  
Default for Register 0x0708 to Register 0x70A = 0x00000A = 10 (10% or 100,000 ppm).  
The Stratum 3 clock requires an inner tolerance of 9.2 ppm and outer tolerance of  
12 ppm; an SMC clock requires outer tolerance of 48 ppm.  
The outer tolerance register setting should always be smaller than the inner tolerance.  
Table 80. Reference Validation Timer—REFA Profile  
Address  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x070B  
[7:0] Validation timer (ms)  
Validation timer, Bits[7:0] (default: 0x0A).  
This is the amount of time a reference input must be valid before it is declared valid by  
the reference input monitor (default: 10 ms).  
0x070C  
[7:0]  
Validation timer, Bits[15:8] (default: 0x00).  
Table 81. Reserved Register  
Address  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x070D  
[7:0] Reserved  
Reserved. Default: 0x00.  
Table 82. DPLL Base Loop Filter Selection—REFA Profile  
Address Bits Bit Name Description  
0x070E [7:1] Reserved  
Sel high PM base loop filter  
Reserved. Default: 0x00.  
0
0 = base loop filter with normal (70°) phase margin (default).  
1 = base loop filter with high (88.5°) phase margin.  
(≤0.1 dB peaking in the closed-loop transfer function for loop BWs ≤ 2 kHz. Setting this  
bit is also recommended for loop BW > 2kHz.)  
Rev. A | Page 87 of 104  
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
Table 83. DPLL Loop BW Scaling Factor—REFA Profile1  
Address Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x070F  
0x0710  
[7:0] DPLL loop BW scaling factor  
(unit of 0.1 Hz)  
Digital PLL loop bandwidth scaling factor, Bits[7:0] (default: 0xF4).  
[7:0]  
Digital PLL loop bandwidth scaling factor, Bits[15:8] (default: 0x01).  
The default for Register 0x070F to Register 0x0710 = 0x01F4 = 500 (50 Hz loop bandwidth).  
The loop bandwidth should always be less than the DPLL phase detector frequency  
divided by 20.  
0x0711  
[7:1] Reserved  
BW scaling factor  
Default: 0x00.  
0
Digital PLL loop bandwidth scaling factor, Bit 16 (default: 0b).  
1 Note that the default DPLL loop BW is 50.4 Hz.  
Table 84. R-Divider—REFA Profile1  
Address Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x0712  
0x0713  
0x0714  
[7:0] R divider  
[7:0]  
DPLL integer reference divider (minus 1), Bits[7:0] (default: 0xC5)  
DPLL integer reference divider, Bits[15:8] (default: 0x00)  
Reserved. Default: 0x0  
[7:5] Reserved  
4
Enable REFA div2  
Enables the reference input divide-by-2 for REFA  
0 = bypass the divide-by-2 (default)  
1 = enable the divide-by-2  
[3:0] R divider  
DPLL integer reference divider, Bits[19:16] (default: 0x0).  
The default for Register 0x0712 to Register 0x0714 = 0x000C5 = 197 (which equals R = 198).  
1 Note that the value stored in the R-divider register yields an actual divide ratio of one more than the programmed value.  
Table 85. Integer Part of Fractional Feedback Divider N1—REFA Profile1  
Address Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x0715  
0x0716  
0x0717  
[7:0] Integer Part N1  
[7:0]  
DPLL integer feedback divider (minus 1), Bits[7:0] (default: 0x6B).  
DPLL integer feedback divider, Bits[15:8] (default: 0x07).  
Reserved. Default: 0x00.  
[7:1] Reserved  
0
Integer Part N1  
DPLL integer feedback divider, Bit 16 (default: 0b).  
The default for Register 0x0715 to Register 0x717 = 0x0076B (which equals N1 = 1900).  
1 Note that the value stored in the N1-divider register yields an actual divide ratio of one more than the programmed value.  
Table 86. Fractional Part of Fractional Feedback Divider FRAC1—REFA Profile  
Address Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x0718  
0x0719  
0x071A  
[7:0] Digital PLL fractional feedback The numerator of the fractional-N feedback divider, Bits[7:0] (default: 0x04)  
divider—FRAC1  
[7:0]  
[7:0]  
The numerator of the fractional-N feedback divider, Bits[15:8] (default: 0x00)  
The numerator of the fractional-N feedback divider, Bits[23:16] (default: 0x00)  
Table 87. Modulus of Fractional Feedback Divider MOD1—REFA Profile  
Address Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x071B  
0x071C  
0x071D  
[7:0] Digital PLL feedback divider  
The denominator of the fractional-N feedback divider, Bits[7:0] (default: 0x05)  
The denominator of the fractional-N feedback divider, Bits[15:8] (default: 0x00)  
The denominator of the fractional-N feedback divider, Bits[23:16] (default: 0x00)  
modulus—MOD1  
[7:0]  
[7:0]  
Table 88. Phase and Frequency Lock Detector Controls—REFA Profile  
Address Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x071E  
0x071F  
0x0720  
0x0721  
0x0722  
0x0723  
0x0724  
0x0725  
0x0726  
[7:0] Phase lock threshold  
Phase lock threshold, Bits[7:0] (default: 0xBC); default of 0x02BC = 700 ps  
Phase lock threshold, Bits[15:8] (default: 0x02)  
[7:0]  
[7:0] Phase lock fill rate  
[7:0] Phase lock drain rate  
[7:0] Frequency lock threshold  
[7:0]  
Phase lock fill rate, Bits[7:0] (default:0x0A = 10 code/PFD cycle)  
Phase lock drain rate, Bits[7:0] (default: 0x0A = 10 code/PFD cycle)  
Frequency lock threshold, Bits[7:0] (default: 0xBC); default of 0x02BC = 700 ps  
Frequency lock threshold, Bits[15:8] (default: 0x02)  
Frequency lock threshold, Bits[23:16] (default: 0x00)  
Frequency lock fill rate, Bits[7:0] (default: 0x0A = 10 code/PFD cycle)  
Frequency lock drain rate bits[7:0] (default: 0x0A = 10 code/PFD cycle)  
Rev. A | Page 88 of 104  
[7:0]  
[7:0] Frequency lock fill rate  
[7:0] Frequency lock drain rate  
 
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
REFB Profile (Register 0x0740 to Register 0x0766)  
REFB Profile Register 0x0740 to Register 0x0766 are identical to REFA Profile Register 0x0700 to Register 0x0726.  
REFC Profile (Register 0x0780 to Register 0x07A6)  
REFC Profile Register 0x0780 to Register 0x07A6 are identical to REFA Profile Register 0x0700 Register 0x0726.  
REFD Profile (Register 0x07C0 to Register 0x07E6)  
REFD Profile Register 0x07C0 to Register 0x07E6 are identical to REFA Profile Register 0x0700 to Register 0x0726.  
OPERATIONAL CONTROLS (REGISTER 0x0A00 TO REGISTER 0x0A10)  
Table 89. General Power-Down  
Address Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x0A00  
7
6
5
5
3
2
1
0
Soft reset exclude regmap  
DCO power-down  
Resets device but retains programmed register values (default: not reset)  
Places DCO in deep sleep mode (default: not powered down)  
SYSCLK power-down  
Places SYSCLK input and PLL in deep sleep mode (default: not powered down)  
Reference input power-down Places reference clock inputs in deep sleep mode (default: not powered down)  
TDC power-down  
APLL power-down  
Clock dist power-down  
Full power-down  
Places the time-to-digital converter in deep sleep mode (default: not powered down)  
Places the output PLL in deep sleep mode (default: not powered down)  
Places the clock distribution outputs in deep sleep mode (default: not powered down)  
Places the entire device in deep sleep mode (default: not powered down)  
Table 90. Loop Mode  
Address Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x0A01  
7
6
Reserved  
Reserved.  
User holdover  
Forces the device into holdover mode (default: not forced holdover mode).  
If a tuning word history is available, then the history tuning word specifies the DCO  
output frequency. Otherwise, the free run frequency tuning word register specifies the  
DCO output frequency.  
The phase and frequency lock detectors are forced into the unlocked state.  
5
User freerun  
Forces the device into user free run mode (default is not forced user free run mode).  
The free run frequency tuning word register specifies the DCO output frequency. When  
the user freerun bit is set, it overrides the user holdover bit (Address 0x0A01, Bit 6).  
[4:2] REF switchover mode  
Selects the operating mode of the reference switching state machine.  
Reference Switchover Mode, Bits[2:0]  
Register 0x0A01[4:2]  
Reference Selection Mode  
000 (default)  
001  
010  
Automatic revertive mode  
Automatic nonrevertive mode  
Manual reference select  
(with automatic fallback mode)  
Manual reference select mode  
(with auto-holdover)  
Full manual mode (no auto-holdover)  
Not used  
011  
100  
101  
110  
111  
Not used  
Not used  
[1:0] User reference in manual  
switchover mode  
Input reference when REF switchover mode bits (Register 0x0A01, Bits[4:2]) = 010, 011, or 100.  
00 (default) = Input Reference A.  
01 = Input Reference B.  
10 = Input Reference C.  
11 = Input Reference D.  
Table 91. Cal/Sync Distribution  
Address Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x0A02  
[7:2] Reserved  
Default: 0x00  
1
Soft sync clock distribution  
Setting this bit initiates synchronization of the clock distribution output (default: 0b).  
Nonmasked outputs stall when value is 1b; restart is initialized on 1b to 0b transition.  
0
Reserved  
Default: 0b.  
Rev. A | Page 89 of 104  
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
Reset Functions (Register 0x0A03)  
Table 92. Reset Functions1  
Address  
Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x0A03  
(autoclear)  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Reserved  
Default: 0b.  
Clear LF  
Setting this bit clears the digital loop filter (intended as a debug tool).  
Setting this bit clears the CCI filter (intended as a debug tool).  
Default: 0b.  
Clear CCI  
Reserved  
Clear auto sync  
Clear TW history  
Clear all IRQs  
Setting this bit resets the automatic synchronization logic (see Register 0x0500).  
Setting this bit resets the tuning word history logic (part of holdover functionality).  
Setting this bit clears the entire IRQ monitor register (Register 0x0D02 to Register 0x0D07).  
It is the equivalent of setting all the bits of the IRQ clearing register (Register 0x0A04 to  
Register 0x0A0D).  
0
Clear watchdog timer Setting this bit resets the watchdog timer (see Register 0x0211 and Register 0x0212). If the  
timer times out, it starts a new timing cycle. If the timer has not yet timed out, it restarts at  
time zero without causing a timeout event. Continuously resetting the watchdog timer at  
intervals less than its timeout period prevents the watchdog timer from generating a timeout  
event.  
1 Note that all bits in this register are autoclearing.  
IRQ Clearing (Register 0x0A04 to Register 0x0A09)  
The IRQ clearing registers are identical in format to the IRQ monitor registers (Register 0x0D02 to Register 0x0D09). When set to logic 1,  
an IRQ clearing bit resets the corresponding IRQ monitor bit, thereby canceling the interrupt request for the indicated event. The IRQ  
clearing register is an autoclearing register.  
Table 93. IRQ Clearing for SYSCLK  
Address  
Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x0A04  
[7:6] Reserved  
Reserved  
5
4
3
2
1
0
SYSCLK unlocked  
Clears SYSCLK unlocked IRQ  
Clears SYSCLK locked IRQ  
Clears Output PLL unlocked IRQ  
Clears Output PLL locked IRQ  
Clears APLL calibration complete IRQ  
Clears APLL calibration started IRQ  
SYSCLK locked  
APLL unlocked  
APLL locked  
APLL Cal ended  
APLL Cal started  
Table 94. IRQ Clearing for Distribution Sync, Watchdog Timer, and EEPROM  
Address  
Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x0A05  
[7:5] Reserved  
Reserved  
4
3
2
1
0
Pin program end  
Clears pin program end IRQ  
Clears distribution sync IRQ  
Clears watchdog timer IRQ  
Clears EEPROM fault IRQ  
Clears EEPROM complete IRQ  
Sync clock distribution  
Watchdog timer  
EEPROM fault  
EEPROM complete  
Table 95. IRQ Clearing for the Digital PLL  
Address  
Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x0A06  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Switching  
Clears switching IRQ  
Clears closed IRQ  
Closed  
Freerun  
Clears free run IRQ  
Holdover  
Clears holdover IRQ  
Frequency unlocked  
Frequency locked  
Phase unlocked  
Phase locked  
Clears frequency unlocked IRQ  
Clears frequency locked IRQ  
Clears phase unlocked IRQ  
Clears phase locked IRQ  
Rev. A | Page 90 of 104  
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
Table 96. IRQ Clearing for History Update, Frequency Limit, and Phase Slew Limit  
Address Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0A07  
[7:5]  
Reserved  
Reserved  
4
3
2
1
0
History updated  
Frequency unclamped  
Frequency clamped  
Phase slew unlimited  
Phase slew limited  
Clears history updated IRQ  
Clears frequency unclamped IRQ  
Clears frequency clamped IRQ  
Clears phase slew unlimited IRQ  
Clears phase slew limited IRQ  
Table 97. IRQ Clearing for Reference Inputs  
Address Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0A08  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
REFB validated  
REFB fault cleared  
REFB fault  
Clears REFB validated IRQ  
Clears REFB fault cleared IRQ  
Clears REFB fault IRQ  
Reserved  
Reserved  
REFA validated  
REFA fault cleared  
REFA fault  
Clears REFA validated IRQ  
Clears REFA fault cleared IRQ  
Clears REFA fault IRQ  
Reserved  
0x0A09  
Reserved  
REFD validated  
REFD fault cleared  
REFD fault  
Clears REFD validated IRQ  
Clears REFD fault cleared IRQ  
Clears REFD fault IRQ  
Reserved  
Reserved  
REFC validated  
REFC fault cleared  
REFC fault  
Clears REFC validated IRQ  
Clears REFC fault cleared IRQ  
Clears REFC fault IRQ  
Table 98. Incremental Phase Offset Control  
Address Bits Bit Name  
0x0A0A [7:3] Reserved  
Description  
Reserved.  
2
Reset phase offset  
Resets the incremental phase offset to zero.  
This is an autoclearing bit.  
1
Decrement phase offset  
Increment phase offset  
Decrements the incremental phase offset by the amount specified in the incremental  
phase lock offset step size registers (Register 0x0312 to Register 0x0313).  
This is an autoclearing bit.  
0
Increments the incremental phase offset by the amount specified in the incremental  
phase lock offset step size registers (Register 0x0312 to Register 0x0313).  
This is an autoclearing bit.  
Table 99. Reference Validation Override Controls  
Address Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0A0B [7:4] Reserved  
Reserved.  
3
2
1
0
Force Timeout D  
Setting this autoclearing bit emulates timeout of the validation timer for Reference D  
and allows the user to make REFD valid immediately.  
Force Timeout C  
Force Timeout B  
Force Timeout A  
Setting this autoclearing bit emulates timeout of the validation timer for Reference C  
and allows the user to make REFC valid immediately.  
Setting this autoclearing bit emulates timeout of the validation timer for Reference B  
and allows the user to make REFB valid immediately.  
Setting this autoclearing bit emulates timeout of the validation timer for Reference A  
and allows the user to make REFA valid immediately.  
0x0A0C  
[7:4] Reserved  
Reserved.  
3
2
1
0
Ref Mon Override D  
Overrides the reference monitor REF FAULT signal for Reference D (default: 0).  
Overrides the reference monitor REF FAULT signal for Reference C (default: 0).  
Overrides the reference monitor REF FAULT signal for Reference B (default: 0).  
Ref Mon Override C  
Ref Mon Override B  
Ref Mon Override A  
Overrides the reference monitor REF FAULT signal for Reference A (default: 0).  
Rev. A | Page 91 of 104  
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
Address Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0A0D  
[7:4] Reserved  
Reserved.  
3
2
1
0
Ref Mon Bypass D  
Bypasses the reference monitor for Reference D (default: 0).  
Bypasses the reference monitor for Reference C (default: 0).  
Bypasses the reference monitor for Reference B (default: 0).  
Bypasses the reference monitor for Reference A (default: 0).  
Ref Mon Bypass C  
Ref Mon Bypass B  
Ref Mon Bypass A  
QUICK IN/OUT FREQUENCY SOFT PIN CONFIGURATION (REGISTER 0x0C00 TO REGISTER 0x0C08)  
Table 100. Soft Pin Program Setting1  
Address Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0C00  
[7:1] Reserved  
Reserved.  
0
Enable Soft Pin Section 1  
0 (default) = disables the function of soft pin registers in Soft Pin Section 1 (Register  
0x0C01 and Register 0x0C02).  
1 = enables the function of soft pin registers in Soft Pin Section 1 (Register 0x0C01 to  
Register 0x0C02) when the PINCONTROL pin is low at startup and/or reset.  
The register in Soft Pin Section 1 configures the part into one of 256 preconfigured  
input-to-output frequency translations stored in the on-chip ROM.  
The registers in Soft Pin Section 1 (Register 0x0C00 to Register 0x0C02) are ignored  
when the PINCONTROL pin is high at power-up and/or reset (which means the hard pin  
program is enabled).  
0x0C01  
0x0C02  
[7:4] Output frequency selection  
[3:0] Input frequency selection  
[7:2] Reserved  
Selects one of 16 predefined output frequencies as ouptut freqeuncy of the desired  
frequency translation and reprograms the free run TW, N2, RF divider, and M0 to M3b  
dividers with the value stored in the ROM.  
Selects one of 16 predefined input frequencies as the input frequency of the desired  
frequency translation and reprograms the reference period, R divider, N1, FRAC1, and  
MOD1 in four REF profiles with the value stored in the ROM.  
Reserved.  
[1:0] System clock PLL ref  
selection  
Selects one of the four predefined system PLL references for the desired frequency  
translation and reprograms the system PLL configuration with the value stored in the  
ROM. To load values from the ROM, the user must write Register 0x0C07[0] = 1 after writing  
this.  
Equivalent System Clock PLL Settings,  
Register 0x0C02[1:0] Register 0x0100 to Register 0x101[3:0]  
System PLL Ref  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
12 Bits  
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
24.576 MHz XTAL, ×2 on, N = 8  
49.152 MHz XTAL, ×2 on, N = 8  
24.576 MHz XO, ×2 off, N = 16  
49.152 MHz XO, ×2 off, N = 8  
2
3
4
0x0C03  
0x0C04  
[7:1] Reserved  
Reserved.  
0
Enable Soft Pin Section 2  
0 (default) = disables the function of soft pin registers in Soft Pin Section 2 (Register  
0x0C04 to Register 0x0C06).  
1 = enables the function of soft pin registers in Soft Pin Section 2 (Register 0x0C04 to  
Register 0x0C06) when PINCONTROL pin is low.  
[7:4] Reserved  
Reserved.  
[3:2] REFB frequency scale  
Scales the the selected input frequency (defined by Register 0x0C01[3:0]) for REFB.  
00 (default) = divide-by-1.  
01 = divide-by-4.  
10 = divide-by-8.  
11 = divide-by-16.  
For example, if the selected input frequency is 622.08 MHz and Register 0x0C04[3:2] =  
11, the new input frequency should be 622.08 MHz/16 = 38.8 MHz  
[1:0] REFA frequency scale  
Scales the the selected input frequency (defined by Register 0x0C01[3:0]) for REFA.  
00 (default) = divide-by-1.  
01 = divide-by-4.  
10 = divide-by-8.  
11 = divide-by-16.  
Rev. A | Page 92 of 104  
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
Address Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0C05  
[7:4] Reserved  
Reserved.  
[3:2] Channel 1 output frequency  
scale  
Scales the selected output frequency (defined by Register 0x0C01[7:4]) for the Channel  
Divider 1 output.  
00 (default) = divide-by-1.  
01 = divide-by-4.  
10 = divide-by-8.  
11 = divide-by-16.  
[1:0] Channel 0 output frequency  
scale  
Scale the selected output frequency (defined by Register 0x0C01[7:4]) for the Channel  
Divider 0 output.  
00 (default) = divide-by-1.  
01 = divide-by-4.  
10 = divide-by-8.  
11 = divide-by-16.  
0x0C06  
[7:5] Reserved  
Reserved.  
4
Sel high PM base loop filter  
0 = base loop filter with normal (70°) phase margin (default).  
1 = base loop filter with high (88.5°) phase margin.  
(< 0.1 dB peaking in closed-loop transfer function).  
[3:2] DPLL loop BW  
Scale the DPLL loop BW while in soft pin mode.  
00 (default) = 50 Hz.  
01 = 1 Hz.  
10 = 10 Hz.  
11 =100 Hz.  
[1:0] Reference input frequency  
tolerance  
Scales the input frequency tolerance while in soft pin mode.  
00 (default) = outer tolerance: 10%; inner tolerance: 8% (for general conditions).  
01 = outer tolerance: 12 ppm; inner tolerance: 9.6 ppm (for Stratum 3).  
10 = outer tolerance: 48 ppm; inner tolerance: 38 ppm (for SMC clock standard).  
11 = outer tolerance: 200 ppm; inner tolerance: 160 ppm (for XTAL system clock).  
0x0C07  
0x0C08  
[7:1] Reserved  
Reserved.  
0
Soft pin start transfer  
Autoclearing register. 1 = initiates ROM download without resetting the part/register map.  
After ROM download is complete, this register is reset.  
[7:1] Reserved  
Soft pin reset  
Reserved.  
0
Autoclearing register; resets the part like soft reset (Register 0x0000[5]), except that this  
reset function initiates a soft pin ROM download without resetting the part/register map.  
After ROM download is complete, this register is pulled back to zero.  
1 All bits in Register 0x0C00 to Register 0x0C06 take effect only with either a soft pin start transfer (Register 0x0C07) or soft pin reset (Register 0x0C08).  
STATUS READBACK (REGISTER 0x0D00 TO REGISTER 0x0D14)  
All bits in Register 0x0D00 to Register 0x0D14 are read only. To show the latest status, these registers require an I/O update (Register 0x0005 =  
0x01) immediately before being read.  
Table 101. EEPROM Status  
Address Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0D00  
[7:4]  
Reserved  
Reserved.  
3
2
1
0
Pin program ROM load process The control logic sets this bit when data is being read from the ROM.  
Fault detected  
Load in progress  
Save in progress  
An error occurred while saving data to or loading data from the EEPROM.  
The control logic sets this bit while data is being read from the EEPROM.  
The control logic sets this bit while data is being written to the EEPROM.  
Rev. A | Page 93 of 104  
 
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
Table 102. SYSCLK Status  
Address Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0D01  
7
6
Reserved  
Reserved.  
DPLL_APLL_Lock  
Indicates the status of the DPLL and APLL.  
0 = either the DPLL or the APLL is unlocked.  
1 = both the DPLL and APLL are locked.  
5
4
All PLLs locked  
Indicates the status of the system clock PLL, APLL, and DPLL.  
0 = system clock PLL or APLL or DPLL is unlocked.  
1 = all three PLLs (system clock PLL, APLL, and DPLL) are locked.  
APLL VCO status  
1 = OK.  
0 = off/clocks are missing.  
3
2
APLL cal in process  
APLL lock  
The control logic holds this bit set while the amplitude calibration of the APLL VCO is in progress.  
Indicates the status of the APLL.  
0 = unlocked.  
1 = locked.  
1
0
System clock stable  
SYSCLK lock detect  
The control logic sets this bit when the device considers the system clock to be stable (see  
the System Clock Stability Timer section).  
0 = not stable (the system clock stability timer has not expired yet).  
1 = stable (the system clock stability timer has expired).  
Indicates the status of the system clock PLL.  
0 = unlocked.  
1 = locked.  
IRQ Monitor (Register 0x0D02 to Register 0x0D09)  
If not masked via the IRQ mask registers (Register 0x0209 to Register 0x020F), the appropriate IRQ monitor bit is set to a Logic 1 when  
the indicated event occurs. These bits can be cleared only via the IRQ clearing registers (Register 0x0A04 to Register 0x0A09), the reset all  
IRQs bit (Register 0x0A03[1]), or a device reset.  
Table 103. IRQ Monitor for SYSCLK  
Address Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0D02  
[7:6]  
5
Reserved  
Reserved  
SYSCLK unlocked  
SYSCLK locked  
APLL unlocked  
APLL locked  
Indicates a SYSCLK PLL state transition from locked to unlocked  
Indicates a SYSCLK PLL state transition from unlocked to locked  
Indicates an output PLL state transition from locked to unlocked  
Indicates an output PLL state transition from unlocked to locked  
Indicates that APLL calibration is complete  
Indicates that APLL in APLL calibration has begun  
4
3
2
1
APLL cal ended  
APLL cal started  
0
Table 104. IRQ Monitor for Distribution Sync, Watchdog Timer, and EEPROM  
Address Bit  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0D03 [7:5]  
Reserved  
Reserved  
4
3
2
1
0
Pin program end  
Indicates successful completion of a ROM load operation  
Output distribution sync Indicates a distribution sync event  
Watchdog timer  
EEPROM fault  
Indicates expiration of the watchdog timer  
Indicates a fault during an EEPROM load or save operation  
Indicates successful completion of an EEPROM load or save operation  
EEPROM complete  
Rev. A | Page 94 of 104  
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
Table 105. IRQ Monitor for the Digital PLL  
Address  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0D04  
7
Switching  
Indicates that the DPLL is switching to a new reference  
Indicates that the DPLL has entered closed-loop operation  
Indicates that the DPLL has entered free run mode  
Indicates that the DPLL has entered holdover mode  
Indicates that the DPLL has lost frequency lock  
Indicates that the DPLL has acquired frequency lock  
Indicates that the DPLL has lost phase lock  
Indicates that the DPLL has acquired phase lock  
6
Closed  
5
Freerun  
4
Holdover  
3
Frequency unlocked  
Frequency locked  
Phase unlocked  
Phase locked  
2
1
0
Table 106. IRQ Monitor for History Update, Frequency Limit, and Phase Slew Limit  
Address  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0D05  
[7:5] Reserved  
Reserved  
4
3
2
1
0
History updated  
Indicates the occurrence of a tuning word history update  
Indicates a frequency limiter state transition from clamped to unclamped  
Indicates a frequency limiter state transition from unclamped to clamped  
Frequency unclamped  
Frequency clamped  
Phase slew unlimited  
Phase slew limited  
Indicates a phase slew limiter state transition from slew limiting to not slew limiting  
Indicates a phase slew limiter state transition from not slew limiting to slew limiting  
Table 107. IRQ Monitor for Reference Inputs  
Address  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0D06  
7
Reserved  
Reserved  
6
REFB validated  
REFB fault cleared  
REFB fault  
Indicates that REFB has been validated  
Indicates that REFB has been cleared of a previous fault  
Indicates that REFB has been faulted  
Reserved  
5
4
3
Reserved  
2
REFA validated  
REFA fault cleared  
REFA fault  
Indicates that REFA has been validated  
Indicates that REFA has been cleared of a previous fault  
Indicates that REFA has been faulted  
Reserved  
1
0
0x0D07  
7
Reserved  
6
REFD validated  
REFD fault cleared  
REFD fault  
Indicates that REFD has been validated  
Indicates that REFD has been cleared of a previous fault  
Indicates that REFD has been faulted  
5
4
3
Reserved  
2
REFC validated  
REFC fault cleared  
REFC fault  
Indicates that REFC has been validated  
1
Indicates that REFC has been cleared of a previous fault  
Indicates that REFC has been faulted  
0
Rev. A | Page 95 of 104  
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
DPLL Status, Input Reference Status, Holdover History, and DPLL Lock Detect Tub Levels (Register 0x0D08 to Register 0x0D14)  
Table 108. DPLL Status1  
Address  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0D08  
7
Reserved  
Reserved  
6
Offset slew limiting  
Frequency lock  
Phase lock  
Loop switching  
Holdover  
The current closed-loop phase offset is rate limited  
The DPLL has achieved frequency lock  
The DPLL has achieved phase lock  
5
4
3
The DPLL is in the process of a reference switchover  
The DPLL is in holdover mode  
2
1
Active  
The DPLL is active (that is, operating in a closed-loop condition)  
The DPLL is free run (that is, operating in an open-loop condition)  
Default: 0b  
0
Freerun  
0x0D09  
[7:6] Reserved  
5
4
Frequency clamped  
History available  
The upper or lower frequency tuning word clamp is in effect  
There is sufficient tuning word history available for holdover operation  
[3:2] Active reference priority  
Priority value of the currently active reference  
00 = highest priority  
11 = lowest priority  
[1:0] Current active reference  
Index of the currently active reference  
00 = Reference A  
01 = Reference B  
10 = Reference C  
11 = Reference D  
1 Note that the user must issue an I/O update by writing 0x01 to Register 0x0005 to update the status of these registers.  
Table 109. Reserved Register  
Address  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0D0A  
[7:0] Reserved  
Reserved.  
Table 110. Input Reference Status1  
Address  
Bits  
Bit Name  
B valid  
B fault  
B fast  
Description  
0x0D0B  
7
REFB is valid for use. (It is unfaulted, and its validation timer has expired.)  
REFB is not valid for use.  
6
5
This bit indicates that the frequency of REFB is higher than allowed by its profile settings.  
This bit indicates that the frequency of REFB is lower than allowed by its profile settings.  
REFA is valid for use. (It is unfaulted, and its validation timer has expired.)  
REFA is not valid for use.  
4
B slow  
A valid  
A fault  
A fast  
3
2
1
This bit indicates that the frequency of REFA is higher than allowed by its profile settings.  
This bit indicates that the frequency of REFA is lower than allowed by its profile settings.  
Same as Register 0xDOB[7:4] but for REFD instead of REFB .  
Same as Register 0xDOB[3:0] but for REFC instead of REFA.  
0
A slow  
0x0D0C  
[7:4]  
[3:0]  
1 Note that the user must issue an I/O update by writing 0x01 to Register 0x0005 to update the status of these registers.  
Table 111. Holdover History1  
Address  
0x0D0D  
0x0D0E  
0x0D0F  
0x0D10  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
[7:0] Holdover history  
Tuning word readback bits[7:0]  
Tuning word readback bits[15:8]  
Tuning word readback bits[23:9]  
Tuning word readback bits[29:24]  
[7:0]  
[7:0]  
[7:0]  
1 Note that these registers contain the current 30-bit DCO frequency tuning word generated by the tuning word history logic.  
Rev. A | Page 96 of 104  
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
Table 112. Digital PLL Lock Detect Tub Levels1  
Address  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0D11  
[7:0]  
Phase tub  
Read-only digital PLL lock detect bathtub level, Bits[7:0]; see the DPLL Frequency Lock Detector  
section for details.  
0x0D12  
[7:4]  
[3:0]  
Reserved.  
Read-only digital PLL lock detect bathtub level, Bits[11:8]; see the DPLL Frequency Lock  
Detector section for details.  
0x0D13  
0x0D14  
[7:0]  
Frequency tub  
Read-only digital PLL lock detect bathtub level, Bits[7:0]; see the DPLL Phase Lock Detector  
section for details.  
[7:4]  
[3:0]  
Reserved  
Reserved.  
Frequency tub  
Read-only digital PLL lock detect bathtub level, Bits[11:8]; see the DPLL Phase Lock Detector  
section for details.  
1These registers contain the current digital PLL lock detection bathtub levels.  
EEPROM CONTROL (REGISTER 0x0E00 TO REGISTER 0x0E03)  
Table 113. EEPROM Control  
Address Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0E00  
[7:1]  
0
Reserved  
Reserved.  
Write enable  
EEPROM write enable/protect.  
0 (default) = EEPROM write protected.  
1 = EEPROM write enabled.  
0x0E01  
0x0E02  
[7:4]  
[3:0]  
[7:1]  
0
Reserved  
Reserved.  
Conditional value  
Reserved  
When set to a non-zero value, it establishes the condition for EEPROM downloads. Default: 0b.  
Reserved.  
Save to EEPROM  
Upload data to the EEPROM based on the EEPROM Storage Sequence (Register 0x0E10 to  
Register 0x0E3C) section.  
0x0E03  
[7:2]  
1
Reserved  
Reserved.  
Load from EPROM  
Reserved  
Downloads data from the EEPROM.  
Reserved.  
0
Rev. A | Page 97 of 104  
 
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
EEPROM STORAGE SEQUENCE (REGISTER 0x0E10 TO REGISTER 0x0E3C)  
The default settings of Register 0x0E10 to Register 0x0E3C contain the default EEPROM instruction sequence. The tables in this section  
provide descriptions of the register defaults, based on the assumption that the controller has been instructed to carry out an EEPROM  
storage sequence in which all of the registers are stored and loaded by the EEPROM.  
Table 114. EEPROM Storage Sequence for System Clock Settings  
Address Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0E10  
[7:0]  
EEPROM ID  
The default value of this register is 0x01, which the controller interprets as a data instruction. Its decimal  
value is 1, so this tells the controller to transfer two bytes of data (1 + 1), beginning at the address that is  
specified by the next two bytes. The controller stores 0x01 in the EEPROM and increments the EEPROM  
address pointer.  
0x0E11  
0x0E12  
0x0E13  
[7:0]  
[7:0]  
[7:0]  
The default value of these two registers is 0x0006. Note that Register 0x0E11 and Register 0x0E12 are  
the most significant and least significant bytes of the target address, respectively. Because the previous  
register contains a data instruction, these two registers define a starting address (in this case, 0x0006).  
The controller stores 0x0006 in the EEPROM and increments the EEPROM pointer by 2. It then transfers  
two bytes from the register map (beginning at Address 0x0006) to the EEPROM and increments the  
EEPROM address pointer by 3 (two data bytes and one checksum byte). The two bytes transferred  
correspond to the system clock parameters in the register map.  
System clock The default value of this register is 0x08, which the controller interprets as a data instruction. Its decimal  
value is 8, so this tells the controller to transfer nine bytes of data (8 + 1), beginning at the address that  
is specified by the next two bytes. The controller stores 0x08 in the EEPROM and increments the  
EEPROM address pointer.  
0x0E14  
0x0E15  
0x0E16  
[7:0]  
[7:0]  
[7:0]  
The default value of these two registers is 0x0100. Note that Register 0x0E14 and Register 0x0E15 are  
the most significant and least significant bytes of the target address, respectively. Because the previous  
register contains a data instruction, these two registers define a starting address (in this case, 0x0100).  
The controller stores 0x0100 in the EEPROM and increments the EEPROM pointer by 2. It then transfers  
nine bytes from the register map (beginning at Address 0x0100) to the EEPROM and increments the  
EEPROM address pointer by 10 (nine data bytes and one checksum byte). The nine bytes transferred  
correspond to the system clock parameters in the register map.  
I/O update  
The default value of this register is 0x80, which the controller interprets as an I/O update instruction.  
The controller stores 0x80 in the EEPROM and increments the EEPROM address pointer.  
Table 115. EEPROM Storage Sequence for General Configuration Settings  
Address Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0E17  
[7:0]  
General  
The default value of this register is 0x11, which the controller interprets as a data instruction. Its decimal  
value is 17, which tells the controller to transfer 18 bytes of data (17 + 1), beginning at the address that  
is specified by the next two bytes. The controller stores 0x11 in the EEPROM and increments the  
EEPROM address pointer.  
0x0E18  
0x0E19  
[7:0]  
[7:0]  
The default value of these two registers is 0x0200. Note that Register 0x0E18 and Register 0x0E19 are  
the most significant and least significant bytes of the target address, respectively. Because the previous  
register contains a data instruction, these two registers define a starting address (in this case, 0x0200).  
The controller stores 0x0200 in the EEPROM and increments the EEPROM pointer by 2. It then transfers  
18 bytes from the register map (beginning at Address 0x0200) to the EEPROM and increments the EEPROM  
address pointer by 19 (18 data bytes and one checksum byte). The 18 bytes transferred correspond to  
the general configuration parameters in the register map.  
Table 116. EEPROM Storage Sequence for DPLL Settings  
Address  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0E1A  
[7:0] DPLL  
The default value of this register is 0x2E, which the controller interprets as a data instruction. Its decimal  
value is 46, which tells the controller to transfer 47 bytes of data (46 + 1), beginning at the address that  
is specified by the next two bytes. The controller stores 0x2E in the EEPROM and increments the EEPROM  
address pointer.  
0x0E1B  
0x0E1C  
[7:0]  
[7:0]  
The default value of these two registers is 0x03. Note that Register 0x0E1B and Register 0x0E1C are the  
most significant and least significant bytes of the target address, respectively. Because the previous  
register contains a data instruction, these two registers define a starting address (in this case, 0x0300).  
The controller stores 0x0300 in the EEPROM and increments the EEPROM pointer by 2. It then transfers  
47 bytes from the register map (beginning at Address 0x0300) to the EEPROM and increments the EEPROM  
address pointer by 48 (47 data bytes and one checksum byte). The 47 bytes transferred correspond to  
the DPLL parameters in the register map.  
Rev. A | Page 98 of 104  
 
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
Table 117. EEPROM Storage Sequence for Output PLL Settings  
Address  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0E1D  
[7:0] APLL  
The default value of this register is 0x08, which the controller interprets as a data instruction. Its  
decimal value is 8, which tells the controller to transfer nine bytes of data (8 + 1), beginning at the  
address that is specified by the next two bytes. The controller stores 0x08 in the EEPROM and  
increments the EEPROM address pointer.  
0x0E1E  
0x0E1F  
[7:0]  
[7:0]  
The default value of these two registers is 0x0400. Note that Register 0x0E1E and Register 0x0E1F  
are the most significant and least significant bytes of the target address, respectively. Because the  
previous register contains a data instruction, these two registers define a starting address (in this  
case, 0x0400). The controller stores 0x0400 in the EEPROM and increments the EEPROM pointer by 2.  
It then transfers nine bytes from the register map (beginning at Address 0x0400) to the EEPROM  
and increments the EEPROM address pointer by 10 (nine data bytes and one checksum byte). The  
nine bytes transferred correspond to APLL parameters in the register map.  
Table 118. EEPROM Storage Sequence for Clock Distribution Settings  
Address  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0E20  
[7:0] Clock distribution The default value of this register is 0x15, which the controller interprets as a data instruction. Its  
decimal value is 21, which tells the controller to transfer 22 bytes of data (21+1), beginning at the  
address that is specified by the next two bytes. The controller stores 0x15 in the EEPROM and  
increments the EEPROM address pointer.  
0x0E21  
0x0E22  
[7:0]  
The default value of these two registers is 0x0500. Note that Register 0x0E21 and Register 0x0E22  
are the most significant and least significant bytes of the target address, respectively. Because the  
previous register contains a data instruction, these two registers define a starting address (in this  
case, 0x0500). The controller stores 0x0500 in the EEPROM and increments the EEPROM pointer by 2.  
It then transfers 22 bytes from the register map (beginning at Address 0x0500) to the EEPROM and  
increments the EEPROM address pointer by 23 (22 data bytes and one checksum byte). The  
22 bytes transferred correspond to the clock distribution parameters in the register map.  
[7:0]  
0x0E23  
[7:0] I/O update  
The default value of this register is 0x80, which the controller interprets as an I/O update  
instruction. The controller stores 0x80 in the EEPROM and increments the EEPROM address  
pointer.  
Table 119. EEPROM Storage Sequence for Reference Input Settings  
Address  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0E24  
[7:0] Reference inputs  
The default value of this register is 0x03, which the controller interprets as a data instruction. Its  
decimal value is 3, so this tells the controller to transfer four bytes of data (3 + 1), beginning at the  
address that is specified by the next two bytes. The controller stores 0x03 in the EEPROM and  
increments the EEPROM address pointer.  
0x0E25  
0x0E26  
[7:0]  
[7:0]  
The default value of these two registers is 0x0600. Note that Register 0x0E25 and Register 0x0E26  
are the most significant and least significant bytes of the target address, respectively. Because the  
previous register contains a data instruction, these two registers define a starting address (in this  
case, 0x0600). The controller stores 0x0600 in the EEPROM and increments the EEPROM pointer by 2.  
It then transfers four bytes from the register map (beginning at Address 0x0600) to the EEPROM  
and increments the EEPROM address pointer by 5 (four data bytes and one checksum byte). The  
four bytes that are transferred correspond to the reference inputs parameters in the register map.  
Table 120. EEPROM Storage Sequence for Frame Sync Settings  
Address  
Bit  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0E27  
[7:0] Frame sync  
The default value of this register is 0x01, which the controller interprets as a data instruction. Its  
decimal value is 1, which tells the controller to transfer two bytes of data (1 + 1), beginning at the  
address specified by the next two bytes. The controller stores 0x01 in the EEPROM and increments  
the EEPROM address pointer.  
0x0E28  
0x0E29  
[7:0]  
[7:0]  
The default value of these two registers is 0x0640. Note that Register 0x0E28 and Register 0x0E29  
are the most significant and least significant bytes of the target address, respectively. Because the  
previous register contains a data instruction, these two registers define a starting address (in this  
case, 0x0640). The controller stores 0x0640 in the EEPROM and increments the EEPROM pointer by 2.  
It then transfers two bytes from the register map (beginning at Address 0x0640) to the EEPROM  
and increments the EEPROM address pointer by 3 (two data bytes and one checksum byte). The  
two bytes transferred correspond to the reference inputs parameters in the register map.  
Rev. A | Page 99 of 104  
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
Table 121. EEPROM Storage Sequence for REFA Profile Settings  
Address  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0E2A  
[7:0] REFA Profile The default value of this register is 0x26, which the controller interprets as a data instruction. Its decimal  
value is 38, so this tells the controller to transfer 39 bytes of data (38 + 1), beginning at the address that  
is specified by the next two bytes. The controller stores 0x26 in the EEPROM and increments the EEPROM  
address pointer.  
0x0E2B  
0x0E2C  
[7:0]  
The default value of these two registers is 0x0700. Note that Register 0x0E2B and Register 0x0E2C are  
the most significant and least significant bytes of the target address, respectively. Because the previous  
register contains a data instruction, these two registers define a starting address (in this case, 0x0700).  
The controller stores 0x0700 in the EEPROM and increments the EEPROM pointer by 2. It then transfers  
39 bytes from the register map (beginning at Address 0x0700) to the EEPROM and increments the  
EEPROM address pointer by 40 (39 data bytes and one checksum byte). The 39 bytes transferred  
correspond to the REFA profile parameters in the register map.  
[7:0]  
Table 122. EEPROM Storage Sequence for REFB Profile Settings  
Address  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0E2D  
[7:0] REFB profile The default value of this register is 0x26, which the controller interprets as a data instruction. Its decimal  
value is 38, so this tells the controller to transfer 39 bytes of data (38 + 1), beginning at the address that is  
specified by the next two bytes. The controller stores 0x26 in the EEPROM and increments the EEPROM  
address pointer.  
0x0E2E  
0x0E2F  
[7:0]  
The default value of these two registers is 0x0740. Note that Register 0x0E2E and Register 0x0E2F are the  
most significant and least significant bytes of the target address, respectively. Because the previous register  
contains a data instruction, these two registers define a starting address (in this case, 0x0740). The controller  
stores 0x0740 in the EEPROM and increments the EEPROM pointer by 2. It then transfers 39 bytes from the  
register map (beginning at Address 0x0740) to the EEPROM and increments the EEPROM address pointer  
by 40 (39 data bytes and one checksum byte). The 39 bytes transferred correspond to the REFB profile  
parameters in the register map.  
[7:0]  
Table 123. EEPROM Storage Sequence for REFC Profile Settings  
Address  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0E30  
[7:0] REFC profile The default value of this register is 0x26, which the controller interprets as a data instruction. Its decimal  
value is 38, so this tells the controller to transfer 39 bytes of data (38 + 1), beginning at the address that is  
specified by the next two bytes. The controller stores 0x26 in the EEPROM and increments the EEPROM  
address pointer.  
0x0E31  
0x0E32  
[7:0]  
The default value of these two registers is 0x0780. Note that Register 0x0E31 and Register 0x0E32 are  
the most significant and least significant bytes of the target address, respectively. Because the previous  
register contains a data instruction, these two registers define a starting address (in this case, 0x0780).  
The controller stores 0x0780 in the EEPROM and increments the EEPROM pointer by 2. It then transfers  
39 bytes from the register map (beginning at Address 0x0780) to the EEPROM and increments the  
EEPROM address pointer by 40 (39 data bytes and one checksum byte). The 39 bytes transferred  
correspond to the REFC profile parameters in the register map.  
[7:0]  
Table 124. EEPROM Storage Sequence for REFD Profile Settings  
Address  
Bits  
Bit Name  
Description  
0x0E33  
[7:0] REFD profile The default value of this register is 0x26, which the controller interprets as a data instruction. Its decimal  
value is 38, so this tells the controller to transfer 39 bytes of data (38 + 1), beginning at the address that is  
specified by the next two bytes. The controller stores 0x26 in the EEPROM and increments the EEPROM  
address pointer.  
0x0E34  
0x0E35  
[7:0]  
The default value of these two registers is 0x07C0. Note that Register 0x0E34 and Register 0x0E35 are  
the most significant and least significant bytes of the target address, respectively. Because the previous  
register contains a data instruction, these two registers define a starting address (in this case, 0x07C0).  
The controller stores 0x07C0 in the EEPROM and increments the EEPROM pointer by 2. It then transfers  
39 bytes from the register map (beginning at Address 0x07C0) to the EEPROM and increments the EEPROM  
address pointer by 40 (39 data bytes and one checksum byte). The 39 bytes transferred correspond to  
the REFD profile parameters in the register map.  
[7:0]  
Rev. A | Page 100 of 104  
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
Table 125. EEPROM Storage Sequence for Operational Control Settings  
Address  
Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x0E37  
[7:0] Operational controls The default value of this register is 0x0D, which the controller interprets as a data instruction.  
Its decimal value is 13, so this tells the controller to transfer 14 bytes of data (13 + 1), beginning  
at the address specified by the next two bytes. The controller stores 0x0D in the EEPROM and  
increments the EEPROM address pointer.  
0x0E38  
0x0E39  
[7:0]  
The default value of these two registers is 0x0A00. Note that Register 0x0E38 and Register 0x0E39  
are the most significant and least significant bytes of the target address, respectively. Because  
the previous register contains a data instruction, these two registers define a starting address  
(in this case, 0x0A00). The controller stores 0x0A00 in the EEPROM and increments the EEPROM  
pointer by 2. It then transfers 14 bytes from the register map (beginning at Address 0x0A00) to  
the EEPROM and increments the EEPROM address pointer by 15 (14 data bytes and one checksum  
byte). The 14 bytes transferred correspond to the operational controls parameters in the register map.  
[7:0]  
Table 126. EEPROM Storage Sequence for APLL Calibration  
Address  
Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x0E3A  
[7:0] Calibrate APLL  
The default value of this register is 0xA0, which the controller interprets as a calibrate instruction. The  
controller stores 0xA0 in the EEPROM and increments the EEPROM address pointer.  
0x0E3B  
[7:0] I/O update  
The default value of this register is 0x80, which the controller interprets as an I/O update instruction.  
The controller stores 0x80 in the EEPROM and increments the EEPROM address pointer.  
Table 127. EEPROM Storage Sequence for End of Data  
Address  
Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x0E3C  
[7:0] End of data  
The default value of this register is 0xFF, which the controller interprets as an end instruction. The  
controller stores this instruction in the EEPROM, resets the EEPROM address pointer, and enters  
an idle state.  
Note that if this is a pause rather than an end instruction, the controller actions are the same  
except that the controller increments the EEPROM address pointer rather than resetting it.  
Table 128. Available for Additional EEPROM Instructions  
Address  
Bits Bit Name  
Description  
0x0E3D  
[7:0] Unused  
This area is available for additional EEPROM instructions.  
to 0xE45  
Rev. A | Page 101 of 104  
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
Table 129. Multifunction Pin Output Functions (D7 = 1)  
Register Value  
Output Function  
Equivalent Status Register  
None  
0x80  
Static Logic 0  
0x81  
Static Logic 1  
None  
0x82  
0x83  
0x84  
0x85  
0x86  
0x87  
0x88  
0x89  
System clock divided by 32  
Watchdog timer output  
EEPROM upload in progress  
EEPROM download in progress  
EEPROM fault detected  
SYSCLK PLL lock detected  
SYSCLK PLL stable  
Output PLL locked  
APLL calibration in process  
APLL input reference present  
All PLLs locked  
None  
None  
Register 0x0D00, Bit 0  
Register 0x0D00, Bit 1  
Register 0x0D00, Bit 2  
Register 0x0D01, Bit 0  
Register 0x0D01, Bit 1  
Register 0x0D01, Bit 2  
Register 0x0D01, Bit 3  
Register 0x0D01, Bit 4  
Register 0x0D01, Bit 5  
0x8A  
0x8B  
0x8C  
(DPLL phase lock) and (APLL lock) and (sys PLL lock)  
(DPLL phase lock) and (APLL lock)  
Reserved  
0x8D  
0x8E  
Register 0x0D01, Bit 6  
0x8F  
Reserved  
0x90  
0x91  
0x92  
0x93  
0x94  
0x95  
0x96  
0x97  
0x98  
0x99  
0x9A to 0x9F  
0xA0  
0xA1  
DPLL free run  
DPLL active  
DPLL in holdover  
Register 0x0D08, Bit 0  
Register 0x0D08, Bit 1  
Register 0x0D08, Bit 2  
Register 0x0D08, Bit 3  
Register 0x0D08, Bit 4  
Register 0x0D08, Bit 5  
Register 0x0D08, Bit 6  
Register 0x0D09, Bit 5  
Register 0x0D09, Bit 4  
Register 0x0D05, Bit 4  
DPLL in reference switchover  
DPLL phase locked  
DPLL frequency locked  
DPLL phase slew limited  
DPLL frequency clamped  
Tuning word history available  
Tuning word history updated  
Reserved  
Reference A fault  
Reference B fault  
Reference C fault  
Reference D fault  
Register 0x0D0B, Bit 2  
Register 0x0D0B, Bit 6  
Register 0x0D0C, Bit 2  
Register 0x0D0C, Bit 6  
0xA2  
0xA3  
0xA4 to Ax2F  
0xB0  
0xB1  
0xB2  
0xB3  
Reserved  
Reference A valid  
Reference B valid  
Reference C valid  
Register 0x0D0B, Bit 3  
Register 0x0D0B, Bit 7  
Register 0x0D0C, Bit 3  
Register 0x0D0C, Bit 7  
Reference D valid  
0xB4 to 0xBF  
0xC0  
0xC1  
0xC2  
0xC3  
0xC4 to 0xCF  
0xD0  
0xD1  
Reserved  
Reference A active  
Reference B active  
Reference C active  
Reference D active  
Reserved  
Clock distribution sync pulse  
Soft pin configuration in progress  
Reserved  
Register 0x0D09, Bits[1:0]  
Register 0x0D09, Bits[1:0]  
Register 0x0D09, Bits[1:0]  
Register 0x0D09, Bits[1:0]  
Register 0x0D03, Bit 3  
Register 0x0D03, Bit 4  
0xD2 to 0FF  
Rev. A | Page 102 of 104  
 
Data Sheet  
AD9558  
Table 130. Multifunction Pin Input Functions (D7 = 0)  
Register Value  
Input Function  
Equivalent Control Register  
0x00  
0x01  
Reserved, high-Z input  
I/O update  
Register 0x0005, Bit 0  
Register 0x0A00, Bit 0  
Register 0x0A03, Bit 0  
Register 0x0A03, Bit 1  
Register 0x0A03, Bit 2  
0x02  
0x03  
0x04  
0x05  
0x06 to 0x0E  
0x10  
0x11  
0x12  
0x13  
0x14  
0x15 to 0x1F  
0x20  
0x21  
0x22  
0x23  
0x24 to 0x2F  
0x30  
0x31  
0x32  
0x33  
0x34 to 0x3F  
0x40  
0x41  
0x42  
0x43  
0x44  
0x45  
Full power-down  
Clear watchdog  
Clear all IRQs  
Tuning word history reset  
Reserved  
User holdover  
User free run  
Register 0x0A01, Bit 6  
Register 0x0A01, Bit 5  
Register 0x0A0A, Bit 2  
Register 0x0A0A, Bit 0  
Register 0x0A0A, Bit 1  
Reset incremental phase offset  
Increment incremental phase offset  
Decrement incremental phase offset  
Reserved  
Override Reference Monitor A  
Override Reference Monitor B  
Override Reference Monitor C  
Override Reference Monitor D  
Reserved  
Force Validation Timeout A  
Force Validation Timeout B  
Force Validation Timeout C  
Force Validation Timeout D  
Reserved  
Enable OUT0  
Enable OUT1  
Enable OUT2  
Enable OUT3  
Enable OUT4  
Enable OUT5  
Register 0x0A0C, Bit 0  
Register 0x0A0C, Bit 1  
Register 0x0A0C, Bit 2  
Register 0x0A0C, Bit 3  
Register 0x0A0B, Bit 0  
Register 0x0A0B, Bit 1  
Register 0x0A0B, Bit 2  
Register 0x0A0B, Bit 3  
Register 0x0501, Bit 0  
Register 0x0505, Bit 0  
Register 0x0506, Bit 0  
Register 0x050A, Bit 0  
Register 0x050B, Bit 0  
Register 0x050F, Bit 0  
0x46  
0x47  
0x48 to 0x7F  
Enable OUT0, OUT1, OUT2, OUT3, OUT4, OUT5  
Soft sync clock distribution outputs  
Reserved  
Register 0x0501/0x0505/0x0506/0x050A/0x050B/0x050F, Bit 0  
Register 0x0A02, Bit 1  
Rev. A | Page 103 of 104  
 
AD9558  
Data Sheet  
OUTLINE DIMENSIONS  
0.60 MAX  
9.00  
BSC SQ  
0.60  
MAX  
PIN 1  
INDICATOR  
64  
49  
1
48  
PIN 1  
INDICATOR  
0.50  
BSC  
5.25  
5.10 SQ  
4.95  
8.75  
BSC SQ  
TOP VIEW  
EXPOSED PAD  
(BOTTOM VIEW)  
0.50  
0.40  
0.30  
33  
32  
16  
17  
0.25 MIN  
7.50  
REF  
0.80 MAX  
0.65 TYP  
12° MAX  
1.00  
0.85  
0.80  
FOR PROPER CONNECTION OF  
THE EXPOSED PAD, REFER TO  
THE PIN CONFIGURATION AND  
FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS  
0.05 MAX  
0.02 NOM  
0.30  
0.23  
0.18  
SEATING  
PLANE  
0.20 REF  
SECTION OF THIS DATA SHEET.  
COMPLIANT TO JEDEC STANDARDS MO-220-VMMD-4  
Figure 58. 64-Lead Lead Frame Chip Scale Package [LFCSP_VQ]  
9 mm × 9 mm Body, Very Thin Quad  
(CP-64-5)  
Dimensions shown in millimeters  
ORDERING GUIDE  
Model1  
Temperature Range  
Package Description  
Package Option  
AD9558BCPZ  
AD9558BCPZ-REEL7  
AD9558/PCBZ  
−40°C to +85°C  
−40°C to +85°C  
−40°C to +85°C  
64-Lead Lead Frame Chip Scale Package [LFCSP_VQ]  
64-Lead Lead Frame Chip Scale Package [LFCSP_VQ]  
Evaluation Board  
CP-64-5  
CP-64-5  
CP-64-5  
1 Z = RoHS Compliant Part.  
I2C refers to a communications protocol originally developed by Philips Semiconductors (now NXP Semiconductors).  
©2011–2012 Analog Devices, Inc. All rights reserved. Trademarks and  
registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
D09758-0-4/12(A)  
Rev. A | Page 104 of 104  
 
 
 
 
 
 

相关型号:

AD9558BCPZ-REEL7

Quad Input Multiservice Line Card Adaptive Clock Translator with Frame Sync
ADI

AD9558_16

Quad Input Multiservice Line Card Adaptive Clock Translator with Frame Sync
ADI

AD9559

Dual PLL, Quad Input, Multiservice Line Card Adaptive Clock Translator
ADI

AD9559BCPZ

Dual PLL, Quad Input, Multiservice Line Card Adaptive Clock Translator
ADI

AD9559BCPZ-REEL7

Dual PLL, Quad Input, Multiservice Line Card Adaptive Clock Translator
ADI

AD9559PCBZ

Dual PLL, Quad Input, Multiservice Line Card Adaptive Clock Translator
ADI

AD9560

High Speed Monolithic Pulse Width Modulator
ADI

AD9560AKR

High Speed Monolithic Pulse Width Modulator
ADI

AD9560AKR-REEL

IC SPECIALTY ANALOG CIRCUIT, PDSO28, PLASTIC, SOIC-28, Analog IC:Other
ADI

AD9560KN

High Speed Monolithic Pulse Width Modulator
ADI

AD9560KR

High Speed Monolithic Pulse Width Modulator
ADI

AD9561

Pulse Width Modulator
ADI